Unisab II(0178-445-ENG-logo)[1]

1/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_425

_en.

fm

03.09

Instruction Manual

UNISAB II ControlComputerized Control System

for refrigerating compressors

Version 2.03

Compressor type: Shop no:

Refrigerant:

Password:

Software version:

2/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

PrefaceThis instruction manual covers reciprocating as well as screw compressors, unless otherwise stat-ed. This manual offers a detailed description of the UNISAB II control system including function, application, service and trouble shooting.

This document is produced by:

YORK RefrigerationChr. X’s Vej 201DK-8270 HoejbjergDenmark

Copyright © 2003 YORK Refrigeration

In the space below you can enter the name and address of your local YORK representative:

This document must not be copied without the written permission of YORK Refrigeration and the contents must not be imparted to a third party nor be used for any unauthorised purpose. Contra-vention will be prosecuted.

This manual is intended for operating and service personnel.

Please read this manual carefully so that you fully understand the UNISAB II control system and know how to operate it correctly. Damage occur-ring as a result of incorrect operation is not cov-ered by YORK Refrigeration‘s guarantee.

Be aware of the version number of this manual. The version number is printed at the bottom of the preceeding page. It is important that this number is identical to the UNISAB II version number ap-pearing for a few seconds in the second line of the display when turning on power. It is, however, possible to use a manual with higher version number than UNISAB II. In such cases use the section List of Versions to view the differences. Never use a manual with lower version number than UNISAB II.

3/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_425

_en.

fm

WWarning!

If it is necessary to service UNISAB II control system, the power supply to the compressor motor must be switched off at the main switch to prevent the compressor from starting up accidentally.

The UNISAB II box contains live parts, which makes it absolutely necessary to comply with the safety regulations on site.

Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment and affect personal safety. Even though the power supply to UNISAB II is switched off, some of the terminals may still be live.

Only authorized personnel is permitted to service UNISAB II. If UNISAB II is connected on a network, always be aware that the compressor can be started from REMOTE. This cannot be avoided solely by making choices on the UNISAB II display.

Emergency stop Activate the emergency stop by a light pressure and deactivate it by turning it clockwise. The emer-gency stop cuts right into the power circuit of the compressor motor guard. Activation of the emergency stop during operation will lead to immediate unloading of the motor guard while there is still power on UNISAB II. In this way it will always be possible to read the state of the compressor.

Whenever the emergency stop is activated during operation, the alarm text COMPR. MOTOR ERROR will be read on the display. Before compressor restart is possible, deactivate the alarm by means of the R key and release the emergency stop. PLEASE OBSERVE: If UNISAB II is set on REMOTE or AUTO, the compressor will restart automatically.

Technical Data

Power supply: Nominal VAC Tolerance Hz

24 +10/-15% 45 - 65

115 +10/-15% 45 - 65

230 +10/-15% 45 - 65

Consumption:

Ambient temperature:

Humidity:Tightness:

50 VA

0-55° C (during operation)

20-90% relative humidity (not condensing)

IP 54

4/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

5/2220178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

-445

TO

C.fm

Table of Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Description of UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Operating UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Selecting a picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Display in Bar or °C/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20The user's own picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Changing of set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Application of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Changing of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Resetting of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Procedure for changing of set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Changing a value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Changing a function, example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Changing a function, example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27SETUP I CONFIG I CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I OIL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I ECONOMIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I MULTISAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I MEASURING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I UNIT/PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28SETUP I CONFIG I FACTORY RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Alarms and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Analog alarms and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Suction gas superheat, alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Auxiliary input signal (4-20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Other alarms and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Oil system error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

6/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Capacity error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55PMS error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55No starting permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Compressor motor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Compressor motor overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Discharge pressure, overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56High motor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Oil pump error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Oil pump error (SAB 80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Full flow pump error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Cooling fan error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Oil rectifier error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Wrong starting number in sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Error in diagnosis - EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Limiting suction pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Limiting discharge pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Limiting brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Limiting hot water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Limiting discharge temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57No communication to Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Chiller, alarm from Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Watch the oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Vi position error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Evolution, alarm from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Evolution, warning from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Evolution, no communication to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58Low lubricating pressure monitoring (screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611. TIMERS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612.TIMER SETUP - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613. SERVICE COUNTER - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614. DATE - TIME - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615. OIL CHARGING - I (screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616. MOTOR FAN I (Frequency controlled screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Timer description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697. P BAND FACTOR - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Stop delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Special timers in connection with MULTISABReciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738.TRANSFER - I Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739.TAKE-OVER - I Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73MULTISAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741. MULTISAB STATE - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752. ALL COMPRESSORS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763. PARALLEL CONTR. - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

7/2220178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

-445

TO

C.fm

Compressor regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81PID regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Table 9A - Settings - Regulating parameters, Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Table 9B - Settings - Regulating parameters, Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Set points on regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Universal regulator (Ext. input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Set point control with current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Suction pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Disch. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Hotwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Capacity control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Climatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Adjusting slide speed (screw compressors with hydraulic slides) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Capacity slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Volume ratio slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Variable Zero position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Corrected capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Automatic setting of new zero point (SAB 202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Manual setting of new zero point (all types of screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Built-in spacer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100The alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Zero pos. picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Electrical slide control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Part load and full load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Calculated Vi position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Change to full load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Change to part load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Position indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Slide brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Capacity alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Limiting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Standard limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Special limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Compressor control and surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111SAB 202, SAB 163H/128H MK3 with oil pump & VMY Mk3 with full flow pump . . . . . . . . 111SAB 128HR and 163HR with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111SAB 283, SAB 330 and SAB 355 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113GSV/RWF with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

8/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

SV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114FV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114FV 19 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115VMY Mk 3without full flow pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2without oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117External starting permission - immediate stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117External starting permission -normal stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Oil charging, manual (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Motor current measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Motor power measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119COP set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Thermistor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Aux. output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Capacity down blocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Power management system (PMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Cold store function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Note on screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121HP on TWO-STAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Oil return (reciprocating compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Oil heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Definition of refrigerant R000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Pressure transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Calibration of capacity slide signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Calibration of Vi slide signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Calibration of motor frequency signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Hydraulic slide systems (certain screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Adjusting capacity measuring system for turning transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Adjusting Long-Stroke Capacity Rod for SAB 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Adjusting Short-Stroke Capacity Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Electrical slide systems (certain screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Diagnosis pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371) Diagnosis I Insp. old alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1372) Diagnosis I Misc. functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393) Diagnosis I Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

9/2220178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

-445

TO

C.fm

4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405) Diagnosis I Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406) Diagnosis I Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1407) Diagnosis I Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418) Diagnosis I No of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419) Diagnosis I Superuser keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14110) Diagnosis I Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14111) Diagnosis I Examine memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14112) Diagnosis J New password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14113) Diagnosis I Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14214) Diagnosis I Zero capacity pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14215) Diagnosis I COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Table 11 - Numbering of digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143Table 12 - Numbering of analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Printed circuit board, light diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Trouble shooting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Replacement of door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Replacement of CPU print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Replacement of relay print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Replacement of EPROM (program) UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Replacement of serial EEPROM (diagnosis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Replacement of battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Please note that at the next power failure, the problem will be the same. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Installation of data communication cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164The cable must have the following data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

MULTISAB regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167System setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Regulation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Start and system numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177- pref. master = COMPR#. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Start and system numbers - pref. master = START# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Example of regulation - screw compressors only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Regulating parameters (for BRINE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Unloading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Operating sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

10/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Unloading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Example of regulation - combination of screw and reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . 186Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Loading sequence - sequence A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187State of transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188State of take-over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Unloading sequence - sequence A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Loading sequence - sequence B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Unloading sequence - sequence B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Practical example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Practical example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Trouble shootingThe plant cannot start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194The plant does not run in sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

List of Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Spare parts for UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Supplementary Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

1. Description of UNISAB II control

11/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_426

_en_

2.02

.fm

1. Description of UNISAB II controlThe purpose of the UNISAB II control system is to monitor, protect, control and regulate reciprocat-ing and screw compressors. Both the control box and the electrical components have been con-nected from the factory. Thus, only a few connec-tions are necessary to link the components to the electrical installations on site.

UNISAB II is programmed according to the type of compressor it is going to controls. See section Configuration.

UNISAB II contains different ways of control-ling/regulating compressor capacity according to pressure levels or temperatures. Compressor ca-pacity can be regulated both manually and auto-matically.

Furthermore, a number of limiting functions have been incorporated. In periods of overloading these limiting functions will intervene and limit compressor capacity until the situation has re-turned to normal. Consequently, the number of undesirable operational stops will be reduced as well as the need for supervision.

Compressors fitted with UNISAB II CONTROL can be linked via the built-in communication sys-tem, MULTISAB. In this way compressors can work in a common refrigerating system, thus opti-mizing the operation of the entire compressor plant.

The communication system makes it possible also to connect UNISAB II with a PLC or PC cen-tral monitoring, control and data logging system. UNISAB II can be linked to and communicate with old SABROE control units such as PROSAB II and UNISAB S/R/RT/RTH.

Other possibilities:

• UNISAB II can be configured to run as a chiller controller.

• By inserting an optional communication print, UNISAB II can be configured to com-municate with

a PLC, the configuration by the name EVO-LUTION

one or more Quantum compressor control-lers also manufactured by YORK Refrigeration.

The above points are described in separate man-uals, only the configuration is included in this man-ual.

UNISAB II is operated by means of a front panel as shown in the following drawing. The front panel is well-arranged with only a few keys and a distinct display.

The subsequent description refers to the numbers in the drawing. On delivery UNISAB II is preset with a number of factory values and is thus ready for operation. Therefore, only a few adjustments are necessary to adapt the UNISAB II system to its actual use. For this purpose, use the enclosed leaflet Quick Reference.

UNISAB II is constructed not to lose its preset or changed values in case of a temporary power fail-ure. UNISAB II is fitted with a battery, which is used by the built-in timer so that time and date are always correct even though current has been dis-connected. The hour counter and any stored alarm values will thus maintain the correct time.


12/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 1.1 UNISAB II front panel

Operating UNISAB II control

Start-upOn delivery all electrical components in the com-

pressor are connected to UNISAB II. On site it is

only necessary to add the correct supply voltage from the local installations. The electric wiring must be carried out according to the wiring dia-

grams for UNISAB II at the end of this manual.

Note in particular

a. that no outside voltage must be applied to the

digital inputs of UNISAB II.

b. that the code plug for the supply voltage must be correct compared to the local supply volt-age. (see Fig. 1.2)

Fig. 1.2 Drawing of plugs and their positions

Also check that the 3 Amp fuse is in good working condition.

Suct.temp. -25°CDisch.temp. 38°COil press. 4.3 barReady 0%

10 3 4789 2 5 6 1 11 1213 14 15

230 VAC 115 VAC

UNISAB II


13/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_426

_en_

2.02

.fm

Fig. 1.3 Drawing of fuses and their positions

Before any voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the

emergency stop switch will be activated.

When voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the follow-

ing Main picture will appear in the display, and

UNISAB II will be ready for operation.

UNISAB II has been programmed with values for

warning limits, alarm limits, set points, etc. This makes it possible to start up the compressor im-mediately.

However, some of the values must always be adapted to the actual operating situation. For this purpose use the enclosed leaflet Quick Refer-ence. It is also recommended to read this manual carefully to acquire a thorough knowledge of how

to operate UNISAB II.

UNISAB II is operated exclusively by means of the

front panel keys. Reading of operating conditions as well as changing of limiting values and set

points is carried out via the display. The display contains a number of different pictures.

The control panel is usually closed and locked with a screw at each end of the panel.

By turning the screws half a turn the control panel is loosened and can be lifted to an open position, Here, it is fastened to the cabinet (see Fig. 1.4).

Fig. 1.4 Opening the cabinet

In this way it is still easy to operate the control panel. At the same time easy access to the cabi-net interior is obtained.

When UNISAB II is open, it is still fully opera-

tional.

DisplayPos. 1 Has a constant background illumina-

tion and displays 4 lines each with 20 characters. The contrast has been factory set, but can be adjusted if re-quired. See subsection Contrast (display) in section Languages. Pressure levels, temperatures, set points as well as warning and alarm limits can be read in the display.

SUCT.PRESS 0,0 BAR

DISCH.PRES 0,0 BAR

MOTOR CURR 0 A

STOPPED 0 %

UNISAB II

1 2 33 Amp

UNISAB II

UNISAB II


14/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Front panel

The UNISAB II front panel is divided into two sec-

tions:The control section, pos. 2 to 10, by means of which the compressor is controlled.The recording section, pos. 11 to 15, by means of which menu pictures are selected and values changed.

Control section:

Pos. 2 Green lamp indicating whether the compressor is running. At start-up

this lamp will flash until UNISAB II

has received feedback from the mo-tor starter. At the same time the text "STARTING" (lamp flashes) and "OPERATING" (lamp light steady) can be seen in the bottom line of an operating picture.

Pos. 3 Yellow lamp indicating whether the state of operation is automatic or manual. Yellow light = manual op-eration.

Pos. 4 Red lamp indicating warning or alarm. Slow flashes = warning; Quick flashes = alarm.

Pos. 5 A Compressor start at manual operation by pressing the key once.Works only if yellow lamp pos. 3 is lit.

Pos. 6 B Compressor stop at manual oper-ation by pressing the key once.Works only if yellow lamp pos. 3 is lit.

Pos. 7 C A change between manual (yellow lamp on) and automatic (yellow lamp off) takes place by pressing the key once.Please note that if manual was se-lected from the CONTROL menu, it

is not possible to change to automat-ic. See section Control Mode.

Pos. 8 D Key used to acknowledge alarms.

Pos. 9 E Loading of capacity during manual operation. On screw compressors the slide moves towards higher ca-pacity as long as the key is held down. On reciprocating compressors a new capacity stage is loaded every time the key is pressed.

Pos. 10 F Unloading of capacity during man-ual operation. On screw compres-sors the slide moves towards lower capacity as long as the key is held down. On reciprocating compressors one capacity stage is unloaded every time the key is pressed.

Recording section

Pos. 11 The G key has several functions.

When pressing the G key, a change will be made between Bar (PSI) and °C/R (°F/R) for saturated vapours when the display shows a suction or discharge pressure.

Changing the set values can only be carried out by using the password shown on page 1 in the instruction

manual for the UNISAB II in ques-

tion. As to the encoding of a password, see section Changing Set Values.

Pos. 12 H Used for moving left in the menu system. Used for selecting pictures or a digit when changing a value.

Pos. 13 I Used for moving right in the menu system. Used for selecting pictures or a digit when changing a value.


15/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_426

_en_

2.02

.fm

Pos. 14 J Used for moving upwards in a pic-ture in order to point at a certain val-ue, or when changing to a higher val-ue.

Pos. 15 K Used for moving downwards in a picture in order to point at a certain value, or when changing to a lower value.

Menu structure

UNISAB II includes a number of different pictures

on compressor operation, set values, configu-ration, etc. These pictures are built up in a menu system in which a certain picture can be selected by means of the arrow keys. Fig. 5.1-3 show the structure and the number of pictures in the menu systems for:- Screw compressors- One-stage reciprocating compressors- Two-stage reciprocating compressors.


16/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 1.5

°C/R°C/R

A

100%

UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03Menu TreeScrew Compressor

SUCT.PRES.DISCH.PRES.MOTOR CURRRUNNING

Main picture Main menu

SUCTIONDISCHARGEOILMOTOR

BRINEALARMWARNINGSETUP

BrineBRINE TEMP.SUCT.BRINEEXT.INPUTRUNNING

°C°C/R

100%

AlarmsNO ALARMS

WarningsNO WARNINGS

Setup

CONTROLMULTISABTIMERSDIAGNOSIS

CALIBRATECAPACITYCONFIGLANGUAGE

MotorMOTOR CURRMOTOR POWERMOTOR FREQREADY

0 A0 kW

0 RPM0 %

OilOIL PRES.DIFF.PRES.OIL TEMP.RUNNING

BARBAR

°C100%

DischargeDISCH.PRES.DISCH.TEMP.DISCH.SUPERH.RUNNING

°C/R°C°C

100%

Suction

I PARAMETER SETTING

Control

COMPRESSOR CTRL.

MANUAL

Multisab

MULTISAB STATEALL COMPRESSORSPARALLEL CONTR.

MULTISAB

TimersTIMERS

TIMERSTIMER SETUPSERVICE TIMERS

DiagnosisDIAGNOSIS

INSPECT OLD ALARMSMISC.FUNCTIONSSOFTWARE VERSION

Calibrate

CALIBRATEPRESS TRANSDUCERBRINE TEMP.CAPACITY

Config.

CONTROLCOMPRESSOROIL SYSTEM

CONFIG

Language

CONTRASTLANGUSGE GB

H

Auxiliary output

AUXILIARY OUTPUTACTIVE WHENAT MAX.CAP

4-20 MA input4 MA20 MA

CAPACITY SETPOINT

Analog. inputPRES. INP 1PT 100 INP 1

EXT.

Dig. outputD.OUTPUTD.OUTPUTD.OUTPUTD.OUTPUT

Dig. inputD.INPUTD.INPUTD.INPUTD.INPUT

Date-timeHOURMINSECDAY

Service-timers

ON TIMESINCE START

HOUR

TimersSTART STARTSTOP STARTSTART DELAYSTOP DELAY

SECSECSECSEC

All compressors

COMPR. # 01 MANUALSYSTEM # 01START # 01RUNNING 100%

Multisab stateSTART NO.SYSTEM NO.SYS.CONTROLLERRUNS BY ITSELF

HIGH ALARM °C/RHIGH WARN. °C/RLOW WARN. °C/RLOW ALARM °C/RACTUAL SP. °C/RSETPOINT 1 °C/RSETPOINT 2 °C/RNEUTRALZONE °C/RPROP.BAND °C/RT.INT. SECT.DIFF. SECP.PART %I.PART %D.PART %REG.OUTPUT %

J

K

SUCT.PRES.SUCT.TEMP.SUCT.SUPERH.RUNNING

°C/R°C°C

100%

CapacityCAPACITYCAP POSVI POSITIONREADY

0 %0 %0 %0 %


17/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_426

_en_

2.02

.fm

Fig. 1.6

J

K

H

UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03Menu TreeOne-stageReciprocating Compressor

NO ALARMS

NO WARNINGS

CONTROL MULTISABTIMERS DIAGNOSIS

CALIBRATECAPACITYCONFIGLANGUAGE

BRINE TEMP.SUCT.PRES.EXT.INPUTRUNNING 100%

°C°C/R

SUCTIONDISCHARGEOILMOTOR

BRINEALARMWARNINGSETUP

SUCT.PRES.DISCH.PRES.MOTOR CURRRUNNING

°C/R°C/R

A100%

Main picture Main menu

Brine

Alarms

Warnings

Setup

Motor

OilSUCT.PRES.OIL PRES.OIL TEMP.RUNNING

BARBAR

°C100%

MOTOR CURRMOTOR POWERMOTOR FREQREADY

0 A0 kW

0 RPM0 %

Discharge

Suction

I PARAMETER SETTING

ControlCOMPRESSOR CTRL.

MANUAL

MultisabMULTISAB

MULTISAB STATEALL COMPRESSORSPARALLEL CONTR.

TimersTIMERS


DiagnosisDIAGNOSIS

INSPECT OLD ALARMSMISC. FUNCTIONSSOFTWARE VERSION

CALIBRATEPRESS TRANSDUCERBRINE TEMP.CAPACITY

Calibrate

Config.

CONTRASTLANGUAGE

Language

Auxiliary output

CONFIG.CONTROLCOMPRESSOROIL SYSTEM

AUXILIARY OUTPUTACTIVATE WHENAT MAX.CAP

4-20 MA input

4 MA20 MACAPACITY SETPOINT

Analog inputPRES. INP 1PT 100 INP 1

EXT.

Dig. outputD. OUTPUTD. OUTPUTD. OUTPUTD. OUTPUT

Dig. inputD. INPUTD. INPUTD. INPUTD. INPUT

DatetimeHOURMINSECDAY

Service timersON TIMESINCE START


SECSECSECSEC

All compressors

Multisab stateSTART NO.SYSTEM NO.SYS. CONTROLLERNOT MY TURN

DISCH.PRES.DISCH. TEMP.DISC.SUPERH.RUNNING

°C/R°C°C

100%

SUCT.PRES.SUCT. TEMP.SUCT.SUPERH.RUNNING

°C/R°C°C

100%

HIGH ALARM °C/RHIGH WARN. °C/RLOW WARN. °C/RLOW ALARM °C/RACTUAL SP. °C/RSETPOINT 1 °C/RSETPOINT 2 °C/RNEUTRALZONE °C/RPROP.BANDD °C/R

COMPR. # 01 MANUALSYSTEM # 01START # 01RUNNING 100%

HOUR

GB

°C/R

CapacityCAPACITYNOT USEDNOT USEDREADY

0%0%0%0%


18/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 1.7

I

J

K

H

UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03Menu TreeTwo-stage reciprocating com-pressor

Main pictureSUCH.PRES.DISCH.PRES.MOTOR CURRRUNNING

°C/R°C/R

A100%

Main menuSUCTIONDISCHARGEOILMOTOR

INTERMEDALARM

WARNINGSETUP

DischargeDISCH.PRES.DISCH.TEMP.DISCH.SUPERH.RUNNING

°C/R°C°C

100%

OilSUCT.PRES.OIL PRES.OIL TEMP.RUNNING

BARBAR

°C100%

Motor

Intermed.INTERM.PRES.INTERM.TEMP.EXT.INPUTRUNNING

°C/R°C/R

100%

AlarmsNO ALARMS

WarningsNO WARNINGS

SetupCONTROLMULTISABTIMERSDIAGNOSIS

CALIBRATECAPACITY

CONFIG.LANGUAGE

ControlCOMPR.CTRL MODE

MANUAL

Multisab

ALL COMPRESSORSPARALLEL CONTRS

MULTISAB

Timers


TIMERS

DiagnosisDIAGNOSIS

INSPECT OLD ARLAMSMISC. FUNCTIONSSOFTWARE VERSION

CalibrateCALIBRATEPRES. TRANSDUCERBRINE TEMP.CAPACITY

Config.

TYPEREFRIGERANCONTROL ONVOLUME RATIO.

LanguageCONTRASTLANGUAGE

Auxiliary outputAUXILIARY OUTPUTACTIVATE WHWNAT MAX. CAP

4-20 MA input4 MA20 MA

SUCT. PRES.

4-20 MA inputPRES. INP 1PT 100 INR 1

EXT.

Dig. outputD.OUTPUTD.OUTPUTD.OUTPUTD.OUTPUT

Dig. inputD.INPUTD.INPUTD.INPUTD.INPUT

Date-timeHOURMINSECDAY

Service timers

ON TIMESINCE START

HOUR


SECSECSECSEC

All compressorsCOMPR. # 01 MANUALSYSTEM # 01START # 01RUNNING 100%

Multisab stateSTART NO.SYSTEM NO.SYS. CONTROLLER

HIGH ALARMHIGH WARN.LOW WARN.LOW ALARMACTUAL SP.SETPOINT 1SETPOINT 2NEUTRALZONEPROP.BAND

°C/R°C/R°C/R°C/R°C/R°C/R°C/R°C/R°C/R

PARAMETER SETTING

GB

°C/R°C°C

100%

SUCT.PRES.SUCT.TEMP.SUCT.SUPERH.RUNNING

Suction

MOTOR CURRMOTOR POWERMOTOR FREQREADY

0 A0 kW

0 RPM0 %

CapacityCAPACITYNOT USEDNOT USEDREADY

0 %0 %0 %0 %


19/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_426

_en_

2.02

.fm

In the menu tree the selection of pictures is carried out by means of the arrow keys in the recording panel.

The H and I keys make it possible to move to the left or the right in the menu tree by pressing the keys .

The J and K keys make it possible to move up and down in the menu picture by moving the dark cursor from line to line.

Selecting a picture

On delivery UNISAB II will display the following

Main picture when voltage is applied.

It is always possible to return to this picture by pressing the H key.

To see Set point 1 for suction pressure regula-tor, do as follows:

With the Main picture in the display, press I

Press I

Press I

Note: The items from NEUTRAL ZONE and downwards are only shown when the suction pressure unit of measure is °C/R. See below for in-formation on how to change the unit.

Press K until the cursor is at the desired line, SET POINT 1, which is read.

Press H until the Main picture appears.

To see the set value for the timer START-DELAY, do as follows:

With the main picture in the display, press I

Press K until the cursor is at SETUP.

Press I

SUCT.PRESS 0.0 BAR

DISCH.PRES 0.0 BAR

MOTOR CURR 0 A

BLOCKED 0%

SUCTION BRINE

DISCHARGE ALARM

OIL WARNING

MOTOR SETUP

SUCT.PRESS XX

SUCT.TEMP XX

SUCH.SUPERH. XX

BLOCKED X

HIGH ALARM XX

HIGH WARNING XX

LOW WARNING XX

LOW ALARM XX

ACTUAL SP XX

SETPOINT 1 XX

SETPOINT 2 XX

NEUTRAL ZONE XX

PROP. BAND XX

T.INT. XX

T.DIFF. XX

P.PART XX

I.PART XX

D.PART XX

REG. OUTPUT XX

SUCTION BRINE

DISCHARGE ALARM

OIL WARNING

MOTOR SETUP


20/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Press K until the cursor is at TIMERS.

Press I

Press K until the cursor is at TIMERS SETUP.

Press I

This example applies to screw compressors. Press K until the cursor is at the desired timer START-DELAY.


Display in Bar or °C/RRefrigerant pressure levels as eg suction pres-sure, discharge pressure or intermediate pressure can be displayed in either Bar or°C/R. It is possible to switch between these two units when the cursor is at the relevant value by briefly pressing the G key.

To see suction pressure in °C/R, first select the picture with SUCT. PRESS. With the cursor on SUCT. PRESS, briefly press G and the unit dis-played will change from Bar to °C/R or vice versa.

Pressure levels displayed in °C/R are dew point values.

The user's own pictureAs it appears from the menu tree, there is a whole

range of operating pictures in UNISAB II. Howev-

CONTROL CALIBRATE

MULTISAB CAPACITY

TIMERS CONFIG

DIAGNOSES LANGUAGE

TIMERS

TIMERS

TIMERS SETUP

SERVICE TIMERS

DATE-TIME

OIL CHARGING

MOTOR FAN

PBAND FACTOR

TRANSFER

TAKE-OVER

POS.NO

1 START START XX

2 STOP START XX

3 START DELAY XX

4 STOP DELAY XX

5 SUCTION RAMP XX

6 SLIDE MAX. XX

7 PRELUB XX

8 OIL FLOW XX

9 FLOW DELAY XX

10 NO OIL FLOW XX

11 LUBRIC.TIME XX

12 DIF.PRES. OK XX

13 OIL PRES LO XX

14 OIL PRES HI XX

15 OIL TEMP. LOW XX

16 OIL TTEMP. HIGH XX

17 SUPERH. LOW XX

18 SUPERH. HIGH XX

19 DISCH. OVERL. XX

20 CURR OVERLD. XX

21 MOTOR START XX

22 PMS FEEDBACK XX

23 FULL FLW M. XX

24 OIL PUMP M. XX

25 RECT. START XX

26 RECT DELAY XX

27 RECT DISABLl XX

28 START HP XX

29 NO CHILLER XX

30 CAP. NEGATIVE XX

31 START UNLOAD XX

32 LOW SUCT. PRESS. XX

33 LUBR.PRESS. XX

34 Vi-PAUSE XX

POS.NO


21/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_426

_en_

2.02

.fm

er, if no suitable combination of measuring values can be found in the same picture, a new picture can be constructed.

Thus, it is possible to compose a standard picture appearing in the display.

If the Main picture is required to include eg OIL PRESS instead of SUCT. PRESS, proceed as fol-lows:


Press I and next K until the cursor reach OIL.

Press I

Press and keep G until the cursor covers the whole line. OIL PRESS and value are moved to line 3 in the main picture and SUCT. PRESS, line 1, has disappeared from the main picture.


Before changing the main picture, it is recom-mended to plan how to compose the picture and in which sequence the values should appear. Please note that the new value is entered into line 3 and that the value in line 1 disappears.

If SUCT. PRESS is to appear again in the main picture, proceed as follows:


Press I and again I until

By a quick pressure on G it is possible to switch between Bar and °C/R.

Press G , until the cursor covers the entire line. SUCT. PRESS and value are moved to line 3 in the main picture and DISCH.PRES in line 1 has disappeared from the picture:

SUCT.PRESS 0,0 BAR

DISCH.PRES 0,0 BAR

MOTOR CURR 0 A

BLOCKED 0 %

SUCTION BRINE

DISCHARGE ALARM

OIL WARNING

MOTOR SETUP

OIL PRESS XX

DIFF.PRESS XX

OIL TEMP XX

READY X

DISC. PRESS XX

MOTOR CURR XX

OIL TEMP XX

READY X

DISC. PRESS XX

MOTOR CURR XX

OIL TEMP XX

READY X

SUCT.PRESS XX

SUCT.TEMP XX

SUCT.SUPERH XX

BLOCKED X


22/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Changing of set values

The set values in UNISAB II can be changed by

means of the keys G H I K J

PasswordTo safeguard against unwanted changes of the set values, a password must be used before the change can take place.

When a password has been entered, the system will be open for 60 minutes. During this period it is possible to change the system values before it closes again.

If the system is required to close earlier, press H until the main picture appears. By pressing H once more the system will close.

Passwords are required for changing CONFIG, TIMERS, ALARMS, WARNINGS as well as REG-ULATING PARAMETERS.

Application of passwordWhen the set value to be changed appears in the display and has been marked by the cursor, press G for approx 2 seconds till the following picture appears:

Using the H I and K J keys, enter the correct password.

Press G and the password will be open for 60 minutes for changing of values.

Changing of password

On delivery the UNISAB II password is set for a

standard four-figure password. All YORK Refrigeration companies and agents are able to inform of this standard password.

It is possible to change this standard password to a personal password.

Please note that not more than one password can be used at a time.

Change the password in menu:SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I NEWPASSWORD

With the cursor on NEW PASSWORD, press the G key and enter the current password, cf section Application of password.

It is now possible to enter a personal password by changing the current (shown) password to the one chosen. The password can be set anywhere be-

tween 0001 and 9999.

MOTOR CURR XX

OIL PRESS XX

SUCT.PRESS XX

READY X

PASWORD

1 2 3 4

SET TO ACCEPT / QUIT

NEW PASSWORD

RESET PASSWORD

NEW PASSWORD

+09999

RESET PASSWORD


23/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_426

_en_

2.02

.fm

Important!It is essential to remember the changed password as any changes of the set values will require the application of the personal password. The stand-ard password, of which it is possible to be in-formed by contacting YORK Refrigeration, is no longer applicable.

Resetting of passwordIn case the password has been changed to a per-sonal password and this is no longer known, it is possible to get a special password by contacting YORK Refrigeration. This password must be used to reset the personal password to YORK Refrigeration's standard password.

The password is reset to the standard password in the menu: SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I NEW PASS-WORD

With the cursor on RESET PASSWORD, press the G key, then enter the special password. See section Application of password.

It is now possible to reset the personal password-to the standard password by changing NO into YES by pressing the G key followed by the H key.

Procedure for changing of set valuesThere are two types of changes:

• Changing of values(alarms, set points, etc.)

• Changing of functions(compressor type, regulators, etc.)

Changing a valueTo change the alarm value for LOW SUCTION PRESSURE, do as follows:

• From the main picture, press I until this pic-ture appears:

• Select Bar or °C/R by a quick pressure on G.

• Press I until the following picture appear:

• With the K key move the cursor to LOW ALARM.

• Press G . Enter password if not already open (see section Application of password)

• The cursor is now moved to the first digit, eg 0 as shown in the picture.The signs "+" or "-" may be seen in front of the digit.

NEW PASSWORD

RESET PASSWORD

NO

SUCT.PRESS XX

SUCT.TEMP XX

SUCT.SUPERH XX

READY X

HIGH ALARM XX

HIGH WARNING XX

LOW WARNING XX

LOW ALARM X

ACTUAL SP XX

ETC

HIGH ALARM XX

HIGH WARNING XX

LOW WARNING XX

LOW ALARM -0,3 BAR


24/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

• Using the arrow keys H I K J, enter the new value, eg - 0.5 BAR.

• Press G - the cursor moves to LOW ALARM, and enter the new value.

• It is now possible to change other values during the 60 minutes the password is open.

Changing a function, example 1To change the state of operation from AUTO to REMOTE, proceed as follows:

• From the Main picture, press I once.

• With the K key, move the cursor to SETUP.

• Press I once.

• Press I once.

• Press G and the cursor moves to the next line.

•

• Using the K J keys, change between STOPPED-MANUAL-AUTO-REMOTE.

• Press G to confirm.

Changing a function, example 2If required to change the regulating function to BRINE regulation, do as follows:

• From the Main picture, press I once.

• With K, move the cursor to SETUP.

• Press I once more

• With K, move the cursor to CONFIG.

• Press I once more

• Press I once more.

• Press G for approx 2 seconds and enter the password, if necessary. The cursor moves to the text at the right side of the line.

HIGH ALARM XX

HIGH WARNING XX

LOW WARNING XX

LOW ALARM -0,5 BAR

SUCTION

SETUP

CONTROL

COMPRESSOR CONTROL

AUTO

COMPRESSOR CONTROL

AUTO

CONTROL

CONFIG

CONFIG

CONTROL

COMPRESSOR

OIL SYSTEM

CONTROL ON SUCTION

AUTO START YES

AUTO STOP YES

COLD STORE NO

CONTROL ON SUCTION


25/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_426

_en_

2.02

.fm

• With the J K keys, it is now possible to change between: SUCTION - BRINE - DISCHARGE - HOT WATER - EXT. COOL - EXT. HEAT.

• Press G to confirm. In the same way other functions may be changed by using the cur-sor to point them out.

Factory settings

On delivery UNISAB II is programmed with facto-

ry settings for all values such as: Alarms, Warn-ings, Timers, Set points. These values are stated in tables for reciprocating and screw compressors respectively.

See tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in section Alarms and warnings, tables 7 and 8 in section Timers and ta-bles 9A, 9B and 9C in section Compressor regu-lation.

Although other values may have been entered af-ter delivery, it is always possible to return to the factory settings in the following way:

For safety reasons, first make sure the compres-sor is stopped.

From the main picture, press I once.With K, move the cursor to SETUP.Press I once to the picture CONTROL.Press I once more to COMPRESSOR CON-TROL.Press G to move the cursor to the second line.Press J until STOPPED appears. Press G to confirm.

Carry out factory reset:

Press H to CONTROL and K to CONFIG. and I to CONTROL. With K move the cursor to FACTO-RY RESET. Press I to Factory Reset menu.

Press G and the cursor moves to the right. Enter password if not open. Select YES by means of J .

Select G to confirm.

Press H and FACTORY RESET is carried out.

UNISAB II is now restored to its Factory setting.

LanguagesWhen selecting the menu LANGUAGE, the fol-lowing picture will appear:

Contrast (display)

The contrast setting of the display takes place au-tomatically, but it is still possible to make a manual adjustment.

The contrast of the display is adjusted in the main menu or any other menu in the following way: Press the alarm button and K = darker contrast (lower contrast value) or the alarm button and J = lighter contrast (higher contrast).

The value is changed just like any other parame-ter and has an adjusting area from 20-80.

The value 20 gives a dark display.The value 80 gives a light display.

Changes can be made during compressor opera-tion. The contrast setting for the best display lies usually between 30 and 50.

The contrast can be adjusted from any menu pic-ture by using the keys D and J or K.

Important!A setting within the minimum (20) or maximum (80) area may cause a dimming of the display text. However, it is usually still possible to read the text by means of a heavy illumination and by viewing from an angle of approx 20 degrees. Should this not be possible - ie the display is impossible to read - carry out a "blind operation" as follows:

CONTRAST 50

LANGUAGE GB


26/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

1.Make sure you are in the Main picture, if neces-

sary by switching the UNISAB II off/on.

2. Press the following keys, one time each, and in the following order: I, J, I J and I (see Fig. 1.5),

3.Keep G pressed for 5 seconds.

4.Press J and/or K. The contrast of the display should now change gradually, possibly to the oth-er extreme. However, it should be possible to se-lect a reasonable value (40 or the like). See also section Procedure for changing of set values.

LanguagesLike any other function setting (see section Proce-dure for changing set values), the language can be changed to any of the following, even when the compressor is running: When UNISAB II is switched on for the first time or

when a program RESET has been performed, the set language will be English (GB).

GB = English

FIN = Finnish

F = French

E = Spanish

DK = Danish

D = German

CZ = Czech

S = Swedish

RUS = Russian

PL = Polish

P = Portuguese

NL = Dutch

I = Italian

N = Norwegian

H = Hungarian

GR = Greek

TR = Turkish

2. Configuration

27/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

2. Configuration

UNISAB II can be configured to a number of differ-ent functions depending on compressor type, re-frigerant, etc. Some of the settings have already been made by the factory, but it will always be necessary to make some final settings before start-up.

The immediate configuration can always be checked during operation, BUT if one or more configuration points have to be changed, always STOP the compressor and activate the emergen-cy stop while making the changes.

After changing the configuration, the first pressure on H will in some cases display the following pic-ture:

Wait a few seconds - the main picture will appear and UNISAB II will be reconfigured. At this stage the picture may be dark as the contrast is being

adjusted. This is quite normal. RELEASE the emergency stop.

Changes in the points that will lead to the above situation are marked with ** in the following con-figuration table.

The configuration points are common for 1) recip-rocating and 2) screw compressors and their use is marked in the list.

The configuration points have been divided into sub-menus available from the menu SETUP I CONFIG.

In case of a screw compressor, the sub-menus are composed as follows:

CONFIGURATIONCHANGED

RESTARTING- PLEASE WAIT

CONFIG

CONTROLCOMPRESSOROIL SYSTEM

ECONOMIZERMOTORMULTISABCOPCOMMUNICATIONSMEASURING UNITUNIT/PLANTFACTORY RESET

2. Configuration

28/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

SETUP I CONFIG I CONTROL

SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR

SETUP I CONFIG I OIL SYSTEM

SETUP I CONFIG I ECONOMIZER

SETUP I CONFIG I MOTOR

SETUP I CONFIG I MULTISAB

SETUP I CONFIG I COP

SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICATIONS

SETUP I CONFIG I MEASURING UNIT

SETUP I CONFIG I UNIT/PLANT

3 CONTROL ON SUCTION

5 AUTO START YES

6 AUTO STOP YES

21 COLD STORE NO

22 CLIMA COMP NO

1 TYPE SMC106E

20 SWEPT VOLUM 400m3/h

9 BOOSTER NO

4 VOLUME RATIO MAN

12 ECONOMIZER NO

27 MECH. ZERO NO

28 MANUAL ZERO 0.0%

34 VI MODE 70.0%

23 ADD. UNLOAD NO

7 PRELUBRICATION NO

8 FULL FLOW PUMP NO

18 OIL COOLING NONE

17 WATER COOLED NO

25 OIL RECTIFIER NO

13 ECO. LO. CAP 0.0%

14 ECO. HI. SUCT. TEMP 0.0 C/R

19 RANGE MOTOR CUR. 1200 A

47 RANGE MOTOR kW 1000 kW

35 MOTOR SIZE 500 kW

46 ROTATUNE YES

48 MIN FREQ 1000 RPM

49 MAX FREQ 6000 RPM

11 PREF. MASTER COMPR#

15 COMMON EVAP/COND N/N

16 HP ON TWO STAGE NO

31 TAKE OVER NO

30 COP ACTIVE NO

36 FLOW FACTOR .20 l/pls

37 LIQ. SUBCOOL 3.0 C

38 DANBUSS YES

10 COMPR. NO 1

24 BAUD RATE 19200

29 PORT1 EVOL. FX2N

39 NODE NO 0

40 BAUD RATE 9600

41 PORT 2 QUANTUM

42 NODE NO 77

43 BAUD RATE 1200

50 PROFIBUS YES

51 NODE NO 3

52 BAUD RATE 12M

26 PRESS/TEMP BAR/C

45 PRESS -1/9-1/25

44 MOTOR SIGNAL kW

53 MOTOR INPUT 4-20 mA

54 CAP/FREQ CAP.POS

2 REFRIGERANT R22

32 CHILLER NO

2. Configuration

29/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

SETUP I CONFIG I FACTORY RESET

Carry out configuration as follows:

• Select the picture SETUP, move the cursor to CONFIG. and press I once.

• Move the cursor with K and J to the rele-vant sub-menu and press I .

• Move the cursor with K to the function that is going to be changed.

• Press G and enter password if not already open.

• Use the H I and J K keys to enter the new configuration.

• Press G to confirm.

• With J or K move the cursor to the next value to be changed.

• When finished changing the values, use H to quit the sub-menu and thereby to activate the possible changes, which will make UNISAB II restart.

The following table (cf next page) gives a descrip-tion of each configuration point as well as possible choices with reference to the position numbers in the previous pictures.

33 FACTORY RESET NO

CONFIGURATION

No Function for Possible choices

*1* TYPE 1) Reciprocating and 2) Screw

*2* REFRIGERANT 1)2) R717; R22; R502; R23; R404a;R134A; R507; R410A; R407C; R744; R1270, R290, R000

3 CONTROL ON 1)2) Suction; Brine; Discharge;Hot water; Ext.cool; Ext.heat.

4 VOLUME RATIO 2) Man; Auto

5 AUTO START 1)2) Yes; No

6 AUTO STOP 1)2) Yes; No

7 PRELUB. 2) Yes; No

8 FULL FLOW PUMP 2) Yes; No

9 BOOSTER 2) Yes; No

*10* COMPR.NO. 1)2) 1 to 14

11 PREF. MASTER 1)2) Compressor; Start

12 ECONOMIZER 2) Yes; No

13 ECO LO CAP 2) 0% to 100%

14 ECO HI SUCT 2) -100°C/Rto 100 °C/R

15 COMM. EVAP/CONDENS 1)2) N/N; N/Y; Y/N; Y/Y

2. Configuration

30/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

16 HP ON TWO STAGE 1)2) Yes; No

17 WATER COOLED 1) Yes; No

18 OIL COOLING 1)2) No; Normal; HLI/BLI; Thermo pump; 3-way valve; AKV

19 RANGE M.CURR 1)2) 0 Amp to 2500 Amp

20 SWEPT VOLUME 1)2) 0 m3/h to 12000 m3/h

21 COLD STORE 1)2) Yes; No

22 CLIMA CONTROL 1) Yes; No

23 ADD. UNLOAD 1) Yes; No

*24* BAUD RATE 1)2) 1200 Baud to 19200 Baud

25 OIL RECTIFIER 2) Yes; No

*26* PRESS/TEMP 1)2) BAR / ° C;PSI / ° F; KPA /°C

27 MECHANICAL ZERO 2) Yes; No

28 MANUAL ZERO 2) 0% til 40%

*29* PORT 1 1) 2) NONE; EVOLUTION A1S; EVOLUTION FX2N

30 COP ACTIVE 1) 2) Yes; No

31 TAKE OVER 1) Yes; No

32 CHILLER 1) 2) Yes; No

*33* FACTORY RESET 1)2) Yes; No

34 VI MODE 2) 70% to 97%

35 MOTOR SIZE 1)2) 0 to 2500 kW

36 FLOW FACTOR 1)2) 0.01 to 10 litres per pulse

37 LIQ. SUBCOOL 1)2) 0° C to 99.9° C

38 DANBUSS 1)2) Yes (not changeable)

39 NODE NO (Port 1) 1)2) 0 (not changeable)

40 BAUD RATE (Port 1) 1)2) 1200 baud to 38400 baud

41 PORT 2 1)2) NONE or QUANTUM

42 NODE NO (Port 2) 1)2) 1 to 99

43 BAUD RATE (Port 2) 1)2) 1200 (not changeable)

44 MOTOR SIGNAL 1)2) kW or Amp

CONFIGURATION


2. Configuration

31/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

45 PRESSURE 1)2) -1/9 - -1/25; -1/25 - -1/59

46 ROTATUNE 1)2) Yes; No

47 RANGE MOTOR (kW) POWER 0-2500 kW

48 MINIMUM FREQUENCY 700 to 2000 revolutions

49 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 1100 to 12000 revolutions

50 PROFIBUS Yes; No

51 NODE NO 1 to 254

52 BAUD RATE 12 mbit (not changeable)

53 MOTOR INPUT 0-1 amp / 4-20 mA

54 CAP/FREQ Cap. pos./Freq.

CONFIGURATION


2. Configuration

32/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Pos. 1: TYPENOT-DEFSMC 104 S/LSMC 104 ESMC 106 S/LSMC 106 ESMC 186SMC 108 S/LSMC 108 ESMC 188SMC 112 S/LSMC 112 ESMC 116 S/LSMC 116 ECMO 24CMO 26CMO 28TSMC 108 S/LTSMC 108 ETSMC 188TSMC 116 S/LTSMC 116 ETCMO 28TCMO 28NEWHPC 104 SHPC 106 SHPC 108 SHPO 24HPO 26HPO 28SAB 110 SSAB 110 LSAB 128HMK1SAB 128HMK2SAB 163HMK1SAB 163BMK1SAB 163HMK2VMY MK2VMY 347 HVMY 347 MVMY 447 H

VMY 447 MSAB 202 SSAB 202 LSAB 128H MK3SAB 163H MK3

SAB 330SSAB 330 LSAB 330ESAB 80FV 17/19*SV 17/19FV 24/26SV 24/26

S 50 S 70 S 93

SAB 128 HRSAB 163 HR

GST 13 - 16 - 20GST 25 - 31 - 41

GSV 50 L GSV 64 L GSV 84 L GSV 111 L GSV 147 L GSV 185 L GSV 224 L RWF 270 L GSV 263 L GSV 331 L GSV 339 L RWF 480 L GSV 412 L → 0153 L GSV 412 L → 0154 L GSV 562 L → 0222 K GSV 562 L 0222 K → GSV 715 L → 0109 XL GSV 715 L 0110 XL → GSV 900 L GSV 50 H GSV 64 H

2. Configuration

33/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

GSV 84 H GSV 111 H GSV 147 H GSV 185 H GSV 224 H RWF 270 H GSV 263 H GSV 331 H GSV 339 H RWF 480 H GSV 412 H → 0153 L GSV 412 H → 0154 L GSV 562 H → 0222 K GSV 562 H 0222 K → GSV 715 H → 0109 XL GSV 715 H 0110 XL → GSV 900 H GSB 84 - GSB 465 SAB 283 L SAB 283 E SAB 355 L

SAB 110 SR/LR

Note: Please note that the screw compressors SV 17/19 and GSB 84 - GSB 465 are not yet sup-ported.

Note: Choose GVS/RWF L for compressors with “low volume range” (1.7 - 3.0) and GSV/RWF H for compressors with “high volume range” (2.2 - 5.0). See compressor name plate for indication af volume range.

Pos. 2: REFRIGERANT

NOT-DEF.R717R22R502R23R404AR134AR507R410A

R407CR744

R 1270 R 290

R000

For R407C (and all other refrigerants) the convert-ed pressure is always shown as dew point values.

Before the user-defined refrigerant R000 is cho-sen, the refrigerant curve must be entered in pic-ture SETUP I CALIBRATION I DEF. REFRIG-ERANT R000. See also section Compressor con-trol and surveillance, Define refrigerant R000.

Pos. 3: CONTROL ON:

SUCTIONBRINEDISCHARGEHOT WATEREXT. COOLEXT. HEAT

SUCTION: Pressure is measured by the built-in pressure transducer on the compres-sor suction side. Set point is set in the picture SUCT.PRESS I PARAMETER.

BRINE: Temperature is measured by an ex-tra Pt 100 sensor in the water output of the evaporator.Set point is set in the picture BRINE TEMP. I PARAMETER.

DISCHARGE:Pressure is measured by the built-in pressure transducer on the compres-sor discharge side.Set point is set in the pictureDISCH.PRES I PARAMETER.

HOT WATER: Temperature is measured by an ex-tra Pt 100 sensor in the water output of the condenser. Set point is set in

2. Configuration

34/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

the picture BRINE I BRINE TEMP. I PARAMETERS.

EXT.COOL: At this stage it is possible to connect an external 4-20 mA transducer as cooling function, ie at a rising signal the compressor will load capacity. Furthermore, select EXTERNAL IN-PUT SIGNAL in picture SETUP I CALIB I 4-20 mA input. The points 4 mA as well as 20 mA must be set as the max (20 mA) and min (4 mA) values of the sensor.

Select BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-RAMETER and enter regulator set point, neutral zone and prop.band.

See also section Regulators

EXT.HEAT: At this stage it is possible to connect an external 4-20 mA transducer as heating function, ie at a falling signal the compressor will load capacity.

Select EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL in picture SETUP I CALIB I 4-20 mA input. The points 4 mA as well as 20 mA must be set as the max (20 mA) and min (4 mA) values of the sensor.

Select BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-RAMETER and enter regulator set point, neutral zone and prop.band.See also section Regulators

Pos. 4: VOLUME RATIO (screw compr.)

MANUAL/AUTO

If AUTO is selected, compressor must be fitted with solenoid valves, etc for automatic regulation of Vi slide.

Pos. 5: AUTO STARTNO

YES

If YES is selected, compressor will start by itself in AUTO/REMOTE depending on what is required. Regulation is now automatic.

If NO is selected, start compressor manually even though in AUTO/REMOTE. Howver, dur-ing operation compressor regulates automatically.

Pos. 6 :AUTO STOPNO

YES

If YES is selected, compressor will stop automati-cally at minimum capacity by decreasing demand.

If NO is selected, compressor must be stopped manually even if AUTO or REMOTE has been se-lected in COMPRESSOR CTRL. MODE.

Pos. 7: PRELUBRICATION (screw compr.)NO

YES

a. Select YES for SAB Mk1, SAB Mk3, SAB 202, SAB 250, SAB 330, VMY Mk3, VMY Mk2, FV 19, SV 24/26 and FV 24/26.Prelubrication time is set in picure TIMERS I TIMER SETUP.

b. Select NO for all other screw compressors.

When compressor has received starting signal, prelubrication will start. When prelubrication is completed, compressor will start. See also section Timer Setup, which includes time settings.

Pos. 8: FULL FLOW PUMP (screw compr.)

NOYES

Select YES for VMY Mk3 compressor provided it is fitted with FULL FLOW PUMP.

Select NO for all other compressor types.

Use pump for prelubrication before start-up and to maintain minimum oil pressure during operation.

At the same time remember to set set points 1 and 2, which determine at which pressure levels the

2. Configuration

35/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

pump is going to start and stop. Select picture OIL PRESS I PARAMETER.

SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump will start; SELECT 5.5 Bar. SET POINT 2 is the pressure at which the pump will stop; SELECT 7.0 Bar.For more details, see Compressor control and surveillance.

Pos. 9: BOOSTER (screw compr.)NO

YES

YES means that the oil pump will run continuously during compressor operation. The capacity slide can thus be moved at low pressure conditions.

Note that both SAB Mk3, SAB 202, VMY Mk3, SV/FV and GSV/SGC compressors are fitted with differential pressure controlled oil pumps (see ta-ble 1) and consequently do not use this configura-tion point.

Pos.10: COMPR. NO. 1 to 14This no must be entered into UNISAB II. The com-pressor has now been "named".Two compressors must under no circum-stances have the same number.

Pos. 11: PREF. MASTERSTART#

COMPR#

COMPR#: If COMPR# is selected, the compres-sor with the lowest no (pos 10) will always be the regulator in a MULTISAB system, independent of the starting sequence.

START#: If START# is selected, the compressor which has the lowest starting number and which is in REMOTE (MULTISAB) will be the regulator.

Pos. 12: ECONOMIZER (screw compr.)NO

YES

If the compressor is connected to an economizer, this function must be selected. Thus the econo-mizer is connected/disconnected according to the compressor operation. The connection is impor-tant as regards the regulation of the compressor volume ratio.

Pos. 13: ECO LO CAP (screw compr.)0 to 100%

If the immediate slide position is higher than the set value, connect the economizer. If the slide po-sition is 20% below this value, disconnect the economizer again.

Pos. 14: ECO HI SUCT (screw compr.)

-100 to +100°C/R

With ECO operation it is possible to enter a suc-tion pressure value in °C/R. If the suction pressure of the economizer is above this value, the sole-noid valves connected in the economizer system will be closed. Hysteresis of 2°C/R.

By a combined ECO and HLI operation the set value must not be above -20°C/R.

Pos. 15: COMMON EVAP/CONDN/N

N/YY/NY/Y

This point can be configured to the following four values:

N/N - separate evaporator and condenser for each compressor.N/Y - separate evaporator for each compressor,

XX

LOW WARNING XX

SET POINT 1 XX

SET POINT 1 XX

2. Configuration

36/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

but common condenser.Y/N - common evaporator, but separate condens-er for each compressor.Y/Y - common evaporator and condenser for each plant (ie compressors with a MULTISAB system no).

On plants with a common evaporator the suction pressure limiter cannot start the next compressor in the sequence. This is only possible if a separate evaporator has been configured.

On plants with a common condenser the dis-charge limiter cannot start the next compressor in the sequence. This is only possible on plants with separate condensers.

Pos. 16: HP ON TWO STAGENO

YESUsually NO is chosen

In special cases on a two-stage plant YES can be selected for HP compressors. The compressors can thus be forced to start by means of the input "External starting permission".

Please note that the compressor does not stop before the starting permission has been removed even though there is no cooling requirement. See detailed description in section Compressor control and surveillance, HP on TWO-STAGE

Pos. 17: WATER COOLED (recip.compr.)NO

YES

Water cooling output is activated by a rising dis-charge pipe temperature. The set point for this value is set in picture DISCH. TEMP I PARAM-ETER, SET POINT 1. The set point has fixed hys-teresis of 5K.

Ex.: Sp 1 = 100°C:Cooling starts at 100°C and stops at (100-5) = 95°C.

Water cooling output is closed at compressor stop according to adjustable time delay. In picture TIM-ERS I TIMER SETUP adjust time delay OIL COOL ON.

Intermediate pressure liquid injection (two- stage reciprocating compressors)

The intermediate pressure liquid injection for TSMC/TCMO compressors is active whenever the compressor is configured to TCMO or TSMC. The solenoid valve for intermediate pressure liq-uid injection is activated when the compressor has started and the discharge pipe temperature gets too high.

The set point for this value is entered in picture: DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 2. The set point has fixed hysterisis of 5°K.

Ex.: Sp2 = 90°C. Cooling starts at 90°C and stops at (90-5) = 85°C.

Adjusting range: -20°C-+150°C. Factory value: 100°C.The regulator controls the solenoid valve through the liquid injection digital output.

2. Configuration

37/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

Pos. 18: Oil cooling - setting

No. Type of regulator Minimum Maximum Factorysetting

Unit

RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS

2 Set point 1/oil temp.DifferenceOil cooling

+35 +75 +555(fixed)

°C°C

Set point 2/oil temp.DifferenceOil heating

0 +75 +355(fixed)

°C°C

Set point 1/disch.pipe temp. DifferenceWater cooling

-20 +150 +1005(fixed)

°C°C

Set point 2/disch.pipe temp. DifferenceInterm.pressureliquid injection

-20 +150 +1005(fixed)

°C

SCREW COMPRESSORS

2 Set point 1/oiltemp.DifferenceOil cooling,normal

+35 +75 +505(fixed)

°C°C

3 Set point 1/disch. pipe temp. DifferenceHLI/BLI cooling

-20 +150 +402(fixed)

°C°C

5 Set point 1/oil temp.Neutral zoneProp.bandOil coolingThree-way valve

+35 0 0

+75 100 100

+50 4 5

°C°C°C

6 Set point 1/pressure pipe temp.Neutral zoneProp. BandAKV (HLI) oil cooling

-20

01

+150

10100

40

010

°C

°C °C

2. Configuration

38/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Pos. 18: OIL COOLING1) NONE

2) NORMAL (Screw and recip. compr.)

3) HLI/BLI (Screw compressors)

4) TH.PUMP (Thermo pump, reciprocating compr.)

5) THREE-WAY (Screw compressor)

6) AKV

1) NONEOil cooling disconnected.

2) NORMAL Oil cooling output is activated by rising oil temperature. The set point for this value is set in picture OIL TEMP I PARAMETER I SETPOINT 1. The set point has fixed hysteresis of 5K.

Ex.: Set point 1 = 40°C: Cooling starts at 40°C and stops at (40-5) = 35°C.

Oil cooling output is closed at compressor stop ac-cording to adjustable time delay. In picture TIM-ERS I TIMER SETUP adjust time delay OIL COOL ON.

3) HLI/BLI Oil cooling output is activated by rising dis-charge temperature.The set point for this value is set in picture DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 1. The set point has a fixed hystere-sis of 2K.

Ex.: Set point 1 = 40°C: Cooling starts at 40°C and stops at (40-2) = 38°C.

4) TH.PUMPOutput for activating thermo pump takes place at compressor start-up. No regulation is connected to this function.

5) THREE-WAY Used for controlling three-way motor valve

for oil cooling, which is regulated according to oil temperature. The set point for this value is set in picture OIL TEMP I PARAM-ETER. SET POINT, NEUTRAL ZONE and PROPORTIONAL BAND can now be set. This regulator is usually not used. However, it can be used provided that a valve with mo-tor drive is fitted.

6) AKVDirect regulation of HLI cooling by pulse width modulated AKV valve. During a period of 6 seconds, the AKV valve is kept open from 0 to 6 seconds depending on the regu-lator output signal.

The HLI-AKV cooling outlet is activated by rising discharge pipe temperature.

The set point for discharge pipe temperature is adjusted in the parameter picture DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 1.

In the same picture NEUTRAL ZONE and PRO-PORTIONAL BAND can be adjusted.

Example:Set point 1= 60°C Neutral Zone= 4°C Proportional Band= 5°C

The regulator keeps the discharge pipe tempera-ture between 58°C and 62°C.

Pos.19: RANGE M. CURR 0 to 2500AThis value can be read on the current transformer at the compressor motor guard (not on the com-pressor motor) so that the 0-1 Amp. signal is read correctly on UNISAB II as the current absorbed by the motor.

Enter current in picture MOTOR I MOTOR CURR I PARAMETER. Any indication errors can be eliminated from the reading on the display by multiplying the measuring range with a correcting

2. Configuration

39/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

factor:

before entering the current in the UNISAB II dis-play.

Pos. 20: SWEPT VOLUME0 to 12000 m3/h

The compressor swept volume must be entered in plants which only consist of:

• Screw compressors

• Screw and reciprocating compressors in the same system.

On plants consisting solely of reciprocating com-pressors the above is not relevant.

Read the swept volume on the compressor name plate.

Pos. 21: COLD STORENO

YES

If this function is chosen, it will affect the way the MULTISAB system starts and regulates the com-pressors in a common system. See detailed de-scription under the function Cold store.

Pos. 22: CLIMATE CONTROLNO

YES

If the compressor is used for water/brine cooling or for heating water, the flow temperature can be raised or lowered, depending on the outside tem-perature.

An extra 4 - 20 mA temperature transducer must be connected.

For detailed description see section Climatic con-trol.

Pos. 23: ADD. UNLOAD (reciprocating compr.)NO

YES

Select YES for SMC compressors fitted with addi-tional solenoid valve for add. unload.

Select NO for all other reciprocating compressors and always for CMO, TCMO and TSMC.

When the compressor is started, it will still activate the first capacity stage, but during operation MAN/AUTO/REMOTE it will be able to unload down to 0% capacity. To avoid a high oil temper-ature at this stage of operation, a fixed time limit of 300 seconds which will stop the compressor on expiry has been corporated.

Pos. 24: BAUD RATE120024004800960019200

In this position the speed at which several UNISAB II units communicate with each other can be set.

The new UNISAB II allows a communication speed of up to 19,200 baud.

This only applies to UNISAB II versions manufac-tured from May 1998 supplied with revision G re-lay prints (relay no 7 will in such cases be mount-ed in the socket).

For older UNISAB II units, the maximum is 9600 baud.

Usually always select the highest baud rate that all units on the network can use.

If UNISAB II is connected with UNISAB I and/or PROSAB II, adjust speed to 1200 baud.

Measured current

Display readingCorrection =

2. Configuration

40/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Pos. 25: OIL RECTIFIERNO

YES

The oil rectifying function is used on brine plants in marine execution. In case this function is select-ed, check also the timers Oil Rectifying Start, Oil Rectifying Delay and Oil Rectifying Blocked.

Pos. 26: PRESS/TEMP

BAR/°CPSI/°FKPA/°C

Pressure levels and temperatures can be dis-played in either SI units: Bar, kPa and °C or US units: PSI and °F.

Pos. 27: MECHANICAL ZERO

NOYES

Only in case the compressor has a built-in spacer block as well as automatic Vi regulation, ME-CHANICAL ZERO must be set for YES. In this way the travel of the capacity slide is automatically reduced by the percentage (0-40%) entered in MANUAL ZERO. Thus corrected capacity is cal-culated and shown correctly - see the following ta-ble.

Pos. 28: MANUAL ZERO0 to 40%

For screw compressors without automatic zero point setting, it is possible manually to set a "zero point" below which the compressor capacity slide is not allowed to fall while the compressor is oper-ating.

In case the compressor has a built-in spacer block as well as automatic Vi regulation, MAN-UAL ZERO is used for reducing the travel of the capacity slide by the entered percentage. Thus corrected capacity is calculated and shown cor-rectly.

The value [0-40%] to be entered in MANUAL ZERO must be of the following size:

See the following table.

For SAB 202, which has automatic zero point set-ting, the value 0% must be kept in FACT. setting.

See also pos. 27 MECHANICAL ZERO.

Pos. 29: PORT 1

Note that the use of PORT 1 requires UNISAB II to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board UNICOM IF.

NONEEVOLUTION A1SEVOLUTION FX2N

Select EVOLUTION A1S or EVOLUTION FX2N if UNISAB II is to be used as an EVOLUTION con-trol, ie an extended (PLCY) control in which UNISAB II is integrated with a PLC control.

Select NONE if UNISAB II is to be used as an EV-OLUTION control.

Pos. 30: COP ACTIVENote that the use of COP ACTIVE requires UNISAB II to be fitted with the add-on printed cir-cuit board UNICOM IF.

NOYES

Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted with a function for COP measuring (Coefficient Of Performance, ie cooling efficiency of compressor). COP measur-ing requires an extra card for flow measuring as well as a motor efficency measuring device, cf UNISAB II COP Manual.

Select NO if UNISAB II is not used for COP meas-uring.

[%] Lenght of spacer block 4 x 100

Max movement of capacity slide 2Manual zero

2. Configuration

41/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

Pos. 31: TAKE OVER (reciprocating compressors)NO

YES

Select YES if UNISAB II is configured as a recip-rocating compressor, operates in a combined plant of reciprocating and screw compressors and the function MULTISAB TAKE OVER/TRANS-FER is required.

Pos. 32: CHILLER

NOYES1) Chiller2) Evolution

Select YES if UNISAB II is used as part of a chiller unit control, ie UNISAB II and a UNISAB II chiller control are connected via a communication cable.

See UNISAB II-Chiller Manual.

Always select NO if UNISAB II is not connected to a UNISAB II chiller

Pos. 33: FACTORY SETTINGNO

YES

With this function it is possible to restore the orig-inal values as determined ex factory.

See section Factory settings.

Current configuration as well as calibration values for pressure transducers and brine temperatures will remain unchanged.

Pos. 34: VI MODE70 to 97%

This point is only relevant for screw compressors with electrical slide control. See section Electrical slide control.

Pos. 35: MOTOR SIZE

0 to 2500 kW or Amp

This selection is identical to MOTOR SIZE found in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See section COP setting.

Pos. 36: FLOW FACTOR0.01 to 10 l/pls

This selection is identical to FLOW FACTOR found in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See section COP setting.

Pos. 37: LIQ. SUBCOOL

0 to 99.9 °C

This selection is identical to LIQ. SUBCOOL found in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See section COP setting.

Pos. 38: DANBUSSYES (not changeable)

Functions as header of the menu Communication. Shows that the succeeding COMPR. NO and BAUD RATE refer to the main communication port, which always runs the Danbuss protocol.

Pos. 39: NODE NO ( Port 1)0 (not changeable)

When the optional communication port 1 is not used or used for EVOLUTION (see Pos. 29), the NODE NO is fixed and cannot therefore be changed.

Pos. 40: BAUD RATE ( Port 1)

1200 to 38400 baud

Selection of communication speed for the optional communication port 1 (see Pos. 29).

Pos. 41: PORT 2

Note that the use of PORT 2 requires UNISAB II to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board UNICOM IF.

NONE or QUANTUM

Select QUANTUM if UNISAB II is to work together with one or more Quantum compressor control-

2. Configuration

42/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

lers (also manufactured by YORK Refrigeration) and/or with one or more Grammatic 2502 com-pressor controllers. See also QUANTUM manual S90-010-M and S90-010-O.

Select NONE, if Port 2 is not used.

Pos. 42: NODE NO (Port 2)

1 to 99

If UNISAB II is to communicate with QUANTUM (Pos. 41), select a node number which is not iden-tical to any of the Quantum node numbers.

Pos. 43: BAUD RATE (Port 2)1200 (not changeable)

Selection of communication speed for the optional communication port 2 (see Pos. 41). As Quantum reguires 1200 baud fixed, the speed cannot be changed.

Pos. 44: MOTOR SIGNAL

kW or Amp

When not using UNICOM IF print, the measured signal can be either an ampere or a kW signal.

In case of Amp signal input, use terminals 35-36 for 0 - 1 Amp AC.

In case of kW signal input, use terminals 35-40 for 4-20 mA DC.

However, it is also possible to use the 4-20 mA terminals 35-40 for reading Ampere. In this case choose 4-20 mA in configuration point pos. 53.

Pos. 45: PRESS- 1/9 - 1/25

-1/25-1/59

Shows the pressure range for pressure transmit-ters mounted on compressor. Usually -1/9 -1/25 is selected for ordinary compressor operation (de-fault) and - 1/25 -1/59 for heat pump operation or operation with R744 (CO2).

Pos. 46: ROTATUNENO

YES

Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted on a compressor with frequency converter and if this compressor is to run in sequence with one or more conventional screw or reciprocating compressors.

Select NO if this compressor is to run in seqence with another Rotatune compressor.

Note: This function will be active from EPROM version 2.01 ROTA and later versions.

For further information, please see ROTA Appen-dix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix describes the use of frequency converters together with UNISAB II.

Pos. 47: RANGE MOTOR (kW) 0-2500 kW POWER

Enter the value corresponding to 20mA input. For use of Vacon converter, this value is read on the frequency converter name plate and multiplied by two so that the 4-20 mA signal is read correctly in UNISAB II as the motor power. Enter the motor nominal power in the picture MOTOR I MOTOR SIZE I PARAMETER.

Pos. 48: MINIMUM FREQUENCY700 to 2000 revolutions

The minimum number of revolutions which can be shown on the UNISAB II display when the analog output signal is 4 mA from the UNICOM IF add-on printed circuit board to the frequency converter. The frequency converter must of course be con-figured correctly, ie in minimum permissible fre-quency. See converter instruction manual and list of settings for details. See moreover ROTA Ap-pendix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix de-scribes the use of frequency converters together with UNISAB II.

2. Configuration

43/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

Pos. 49: MAXIMUM FREQUENCY1100 to 12000 revolutions

The maximum number of revolutions which can be shown on the UNISAB II display when the an-alog output signal is 20 mA from the UNICOM IF add-on printed circuit board to the frequency con-verter. The frequency converter must of course be configured correctly, ie in maximum permissible frequency. See converter instruction manual and list of settings for details. See moreover ROTA Appendix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix de-scribes the use of frequency converters together with UNISAB II.

Pos. 50: PROFIBUS

NO

YES

Only for internal use within YORK Marine Group.

Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted with UNICOM IF add-on printed circuit board and is to communi-cate with Mitsubishi PLC via PROFIBUS commu-nication.

Select NO if the above is not the case.

Pos. 51: NODE NO

1 to 254

If UNISAB II is to communicate with Mitsubishi PLC (Pos. 50), select node number which is differ-ent from the node numbers of the PLC control.

Pos. 52: BAUD RATE12 mbit (cannot be changed)

Pos. 53: MOTOR INPUT0 - 1 amp / 4 - 20 mA

Select 0-1 amp when the measured motor current is supplied from a current transformer with am-pere ratio xxx/1 amp connected to the terminals 35-36.

Select 4-20 mA when the measured motor current is supplied from a 4-20 mA transmitter, for in-stance a frequency converter or other equipment. The terminals 35 and 40 are used here.

Pos. 54: CAPACITY/FREQUENCY

Cap.Pos.Frequency

Select Cap.Pos. if the terminal input for capacity (terminal row 29-30-31) is connected to a capacity slide transmitter.

Select Frequency if the terminal input for capacity (terminal row 29-30-31) is connected to a frequen-cy converter so that changes in the motor frequen-cy are shown as changes in the capacity.

2. Configuration

44/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Table 2.1

* If another value than the factory set value of 0% is inserted, the automatic zero setting is eliminated. Therefore, only insert a value different from 0% after having contacted YORK Refrigeration.

Screw compressortype1

Max movement of capacity slide

2mm

Evaporating temp.R717/R22

3

Length of spacer block

4mm

Mechanical zero 5

(pos 27)

Manual zero6

(pos 28)

SAB 110SM84.5 < -20°C 22 NO 0%

SAB 110SF

SAB 110 LM96 > -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%

SAB 110 LF

SAB 128 HM Mk2

126

< -20°C 31.5 NO 0%SAB 128 HF Mk2

SAB 128 HM Mk3> -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%

SAB 128 HF Mk3

SAB 163 M Mk1, Man Vi

160

< -20°C 38.5 NO 0%SAB 163 F Mk1, Man Vi

SAB 163 HM Mk2, Man Vi

SAB 163 HF Mk2, Man Vi

> -20°C NONE NO FACT0%SAB 163 HM Mk3, Man Vi

SAB 163 HF Mk3, Man Vi

SAB 163 HM Mk2, Aut Vi

160

< -20°C 38.5 YES 24 %SAB 163 HF Mk2, Aut Vi

SAB 163 HM Mk3, Aut Vi> -20°C NONE NO FACT 0%

SAB 163 HF Mk3, Aut Vi

SAB 202 SM, Man Vi

245 ALL NONE**

NO*

FACT 0%SAB 202 SF, Man Vi

SAB 202 SM, Aut Vi

SAB 202 SF, Aut Vi

SAB 202 LM, Man Vi

317 ALL NONE**

NO*

FACT 0% SAB 202 LF, Man Vi

SAB 202 LM, Aut Vi

SAB 202 LF, Aut Vi

SAB 283 L 314Not

relevantNot

relevantNot

relevantNot

relevantSAB 283 E 391

SAB 355 L 350

SAB 330 S 262Not

relevantNot

relevantNot

relevantNot

relevantSAB 330 L 371

SAB 330 E 480

2. Configuration

45/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_427

_en_

2.02

.fm

** If another value than NO is inserted, the automatic zero setting is eliminated. Therefore, only insert a value different from No after having contacted YORK Refrigeration.

2. Configuration

46/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

3. Alarms and Warnings

47/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_428

_en.

fm


Analog alarms and warningsALARM and WARNING limits can be set sepa-rately as described in section Changing the set values.

UNISAB II does not check whether ALARM and WARNING limits have been interchanged by a mistake (eg if warning limit for high discharge pressure is set higher than the alarm limit). Con-sequently, during adjustments check that the settings are correct.

If a warning limit is exceeded, the red light diode above the D key will begin to flash slowly, and the warning relay will be activated. The reason for the warning can be seen in the picture WARNING, which also shows whether there are several si-multaneous warnings.

Note that in case of warning, a limiter might be ac-tive as described in section Limiting functions.

When the warning disappears, it is automatically removed from the picture WARNING and the re-lay returns to its normal position.

In case an alarm limit is exceeded, the compres-sor will stop immediately. The red light diode above the D key will start to flash quickly. In the picture ALARM the reason for the alarm can be read, and at the same time the alarm relay will change its position.

The alarm relay works by connecting the alarm/common switch during alarm and by dis-connecting it once the alarm is reset.

The picture ALARM also shows the exact time of the alarm. See also under Diagnosis.

The alarm is reset by pressing the D key, and the warning and alarm relays will return to their nor-mal position. However, if the alarm value is still outside the limit, the red light diode will continue to flash. When the situation has returned to normal, the D key must be pressed once more,

The set values for high and low alarms as well as the factory values are stated in the following ta-bles 1-5. These are followed by explanatory notes.


48/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Table 1

Screw compressors Measured and calculated pressure levels

Measuring Min Max Factory Note

Suction pressure(bar)

High alarmHigh warningLow warningLow alarm

-1.5-1.0-1.0

-9.06.06.0

-5.01.51.0

3+4+53+4+53+4+5

Discharge pressure(bar)


4.03.0-

-1.0

24.022.0

--1.0

16.015.0

--1.0

1+61+6

1+5

Oil pressure (bar)Calculated valueSAB Mk 1 compressors

Low warningLow alarm

1.51.0

6.05.0

4.02.5

2+72+7

Oil pressure (bar)Calculated valueSAB Mk 2 compressors


0.00.0

6.05.0

0.00.0

2+92+9

Oil pressure (bar)Calculated valueSAB Mk 3, Mk 4 compres-sors SAB 202, 283, 330, 355FV 19, SV 24/26, FV 24/26


Set point 1Set point 2

1.00.5

0.00.0

6.05.0

10.010.0

1.51.2

2.54.0

2+92+9

2121

Oil pressure (bar)Calculated valueVMY Mk 2-2.5 compressor


1.51.0

6.05.0

2.01.5

2+9+172+9+17

Oil pressure(bar)Calculated valueVMY Mk 3 compressors

Low warningLow alarmSet point 1Set point 2

1.51.00.00.0

6.05.010.010.0

4.03.05.57.0

2+92+92222

Oil pressure (bar)Calculated valueSAB 80

Low warningLow alarmSet point 1Set point 2

1.51.00.00.0

6.05.010.020.0

2.01.50.516.0

2+92+92020

Diff. pressureacross oil filter (bar)Calculated valueAll types but SAB 80

High alarmLow warning

0.00.0

1.51.3

1.00.7

2+112+11

Diff. pressureacross oil filter (bar)Calculated valueSAB80

High alarmHigh warning

0.00.0

2.52.2

1.61.4

2+11+192+11+19


49/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_428

_en.

fm

Table 2

Screw compressors Measured and calculated temperatures

4-20 m Auxiliary input signal


Discharge temp.(°C)


60.050.0-65.0

-

130.0120,0-65.0

-

100.090.0-65.0

-

1+61+6

Oil temperature(°C)


40.030.010.00.0

80.070.050.040.0

60.055.025.020.0

2+72+72+72+7

Brine temperature(°C)


-60.0-60.0

-100.0-100.0

100,0100.0100.0100.0

60.050.04.02.0

1+61+61+61+6

Suction gas superheat(°C)

Calculated value


6.05.00.00.0

120.0120.040.040.0

110.0100.02.00.0

2+7+122+7+122+7+102+7+10

Disch. gas superheat(°C)Calculated value


5.00.0

40.040.0

10.00.0

2+7+102+7+10


Auxiliary input(4-20 mA)


-999.9-999.9-999.9-999.9

999.9999.9999.9999.9

0.00.00.00.0

3+183+183+183+18


50/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Table 3

Reciprocating compressors Measured and calculated pressure levels

Table 4

Reciprocating compressors Measured and calculated temperatures




-1.5-1.0-1.0

-9.06.06.0

-5.02.51.5

3+4+53+4+53+4+5



4.03.0-

-1.0

24.022.0

--1.0

16.015.0

--1.0

1+61+6

1+5

Intermediatepressure (bar)For two-stagecompressors only


4.03.0-1.0-1.0

24.022.010.010.0

7.06.0-1.0-1.0

1+61+6

1+6+161+6+16

Oil pressure (bar)

Calculated value


5.05.00.50.5

7.07.05.05.0

6.05.54.03.5

2+5+162+5

2+5+142+5+14

Measuring Min Max Factory NoteDischarge temp.(°C)


60.050.0-65.0

-

155.0155.0-65.0

-

125.0120.0-65.0

-

1+61+6



40.030.00.00.0

105.0105.050.040.0

80.075.030.025.0

22

2+72+7

Brine temperature(°C)


-60.0-60.0

-100.0-100.0

100.0100.0100.0100.0

60.050.04.02.0

1+61+61+61+6

Intermediate gas temperature (°C)For two-stage compressors only


50.050.0-20.0-20.0

155.0120.050.050.0

100.095.04.02.0

2+72+72+72+7


51/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_428

_en.

fm


Table 5

Reciprocating compressors HPO/HPCMeasured and calculated pressure levels and temperatures


Calculated value


6.05.00.00.0

120.0120.040.040.0

110.0100.04.02.0

2+72+7

2+7+132+7+13



5.00.0

40.040.0

10.00.0

2+7+102+7+10





-999.9-999.9-999.9-999.9

999.9999.9999.9999.9

0.00.00.00.0

3+183+183+183+18




-1.5-1.0-1.0

-25.025.025.0

-10.03.52.5

3+4+53+4+53+4+5



4.03.0-

-1.0

40.040.0

--1.0

35.033.0

--1.0

1+61+6

1+5

Oil pressure(bar)

Calculated value


5.05.00.50.5

7.07.05.05.0

6.05.54.03.5

2+72+7

High diff. pressure-Pc - Pe (bar)Calculated value

High alarmHigh warning

--

--

26.025.2

1+15

Discharge temperature(°C)


60.050.0-65.0

-

170.0170.0-65.0

-

160.0155.0-65.0

-

1+61+6



40.030.00.00.0

105.0105.070.070.0

95.090.055.050.0

22

2+72+7


52/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03


Notes:Note 1 The alarm cannot be switched off un-

til the problem has been solved.

Note 2 The alarm can be switched off imme-diately (RESET key).

Note 3 The alarm is switched off automati-cally.

Note 4 The safety limits can be entered in bar or °C/R.

Note 5 Alarm monitoring active when digital output "compressor starting signal" has been selected.

Note 6 Alarm monitoring always active - ex-cept when "BLOCKED" has been se-lected in picture COMPRESSOR CTRL MODE.

Note 7 Alarm monitoring 300 sec delayed after compressor start.

Note 8 Alarm monitoring 180 sec delayed after compressor start.

Note 9 Alarm monitoring 45 sec delayed af-ter compressor start.

Note 10 A setting of 0.0 impedes monitoring.

Note 11 Delay of 300 sec, regardless of when limits are exceeded.

Note 12 The compressor must have been above 5% capacity. Below 5% ca-pacity monitoring is impeded.


Note 14 Delay of 60 sec, regardless of when limits are exceeded.

Note 15 Only applies to HPO and HPC com-pressors.


Note 17 For VMY Mk 2-2.5, calculate the fol-lowing (see Fig. 3.1): Oil pressure = Oil pressure 3 (after oil filter) - Dis-charge pressure 2. For all other

Water temperature(°C)


-20-20-20-20

100.0100.0100.0100.0

75.070.04.02.0

1+61+61+61+6


Calculated value


6.05.00.00.0

120.0120.040.040.0

110.0100.0

4.02.0

2+72+7

2+10+132+10+13



5.00.0

40.040.0

10.00.0

2+7+102+7+10





-999.9-999.9-999.9-999.9

999.9999.9999.9999.9

0.00.00.00.0

3+183+183+183+18


53/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_428

_en.

fm

compressor types (except for SAB 80, see Note 20), calculate the fol-lowing: Oil pressure = Oil pressure 3 (after oil filter) - Suction pressure 1 .

Note 18 The limits are not active until AUX. INPUT SIGNAL has been selected in the menu CALIBRATION 4-20 mA.

Note 19 For SAB 80 the differential pressure across the oil filter is calculated as follows (see Fig. 3.1): Oil filter diff. pressure = Discharge pressure 2 - Oil pressure 4 (after oil filter).

The shown oil filter pressure will thus be 0.1 to 0.7 bar higher than the ac-tual pressure loss across the filter due to the pressure loss across the oil separator and the oil cooler.

The maximum allowed pressure drop across the oil filter is 1.2 bar. Consequently, the warning limit should be set between 0.8 and 1.4 bar or lower. The alarm limit should

be set between 1.1 and 1.7 bar or lower.

Note 20: Set points 1 and 2 are used for alarm monitoring of the mechanical oil pump, cf description of the alarm un-der "Oil pump error" in section Other Alarms. For SAB 80, the oil pressure is calculated as follows (see Fig. 3.1): Oil pressure = Oil pressure 3 (after pump) - Suction pressure 1.

Note 21: The set points are used for control-ling the oil pump. When the pressure falls below set point 1, the oil pump will start. When the pressure ex-ceeds set point 2 for 60 seconds, the oil pump will stop.

Note 22: The set points are used for control-ling the full flow pump. When the pressure falls below set point 1, the full flow pump will start. When the pressure exceeds set point 2 for 60 seconds, the full flow pump will stop.


54/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 3.1

Suction gas superheat, alarmThe superheat alarm is an alarm which in many cases will protect the compressor against liquid strokes. However, there are many aspects which may affect superheating for which reason this alarm must not be considered as full protection against liquid strokes.

If the superheat falls below the set value, the com-pressor will stop on the relay. However, on R717 pump circulation plants with a short distance be-tween liquid separator and compressor, the suc-tion gas superheat may drop below 0 K during normal operation.

Oil filter

Compressor

Others

CompressorOil pump

Oil filter

Oil cooler

SAB 80

Oil pump

Oil cooler

Oilseparator

Oilseparator

Suction pressure

Oil pressure 2(between pump and filter)

Discharge pressure

Oil pressure (before compressor)


55/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_428

_en.

fm

In such cases adjust LOW ALARM to 0, thus making it inactive.

Auxiliary input signal (4-20 mA)The alarm and warning limits are activated when AUX. INPUT SIGNAL has been selected under CALIBRATION 4-20 mA.

Other alarms and warnings

Oil system error (screw compressors)The reason for the alarm is that the oil float switch is not activated within the time set in the timer OIL FLOW during prelubrication; or that there is a drop-out on the oil float switch for a longer period than the one set in the timer NO OIL during oper-ation.

Capacity error (screw compressors)The reason for the alarm is that the capacity slide is not below 5% within the time set in the timer SLIDE MAX at compressor stop; or that the slide - during operation - has not moved within 30 mins, although the regulator is to regulate up or down and the output signal from the regulator is above 20%; or that the slide - in connection with auto-matic setting of variable zero point - cannot reach the position corresponding to calculated or adjust-ed zero point (ie positive read capacity) before the expiry of the timer "cap.negative".

1) If the compressor is set on "MAN" or "AU-TO" and in operation, and the slide does not react to the regulating signal within 30 mins, a warning will be issued. The compressor does not stop.

2) If the compressor is set on "REMOTE" and in operation, and the slide does not react to the regulating signal within 30 mins, an

alarm will be issued. The compressor will stop.

3) If the compressor is REMOTE CONTROL-LED by a PC/PLC-system, a warning will be issued as well. The monitoring is possi-ble by means of a 4-20 mA signal in the aux. input or via communication.

The reason for the difference between situ-ation 1) and 2) is: If the system runs in se-quence - REMOTE (MULTISAB), the com-pressor must be stopped to start any subse-quent compressors in the sequence.

When a compressor is remote controlled (3) it is not a part of the sequence - REMOTE (MULTISAB) system - thus stopping this compressor will not start up subsequent compressors.

PMS errorIf the control is to start the compressor and conse-quently adjusts the output START REQUEST (PMS) to ON, the input START REQUEST OK must be set on ON within the time set in the timer PMS FEEDBACK - or the alarm will be activated.

No starting permissionThe reason for the warning is that the regulator in REMOTE/MULTISAB cannot start this compres-sor, even though the regulator demands more ca-pacity and this compressor is the next in line to start. The reason is that AUTO START has not been configured to YES, or the input EXTERNAL STARTING PERMISSION-NORMAL STOP is not ON.

Compressor motor errorThe reason for the warning is that feedback from the motor is not set/does not disappear within the time set in the timer MOTOR START when the


56/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

compressor motor is started/stopped (ie the out-put compressor start is activated/deactivated), or that feedback from the motor disappears even briefly during operation.

The alarm may also occur at compressor start if the emergency stop or an optional high pressure control has been activated.

Compressor motor overloadThe reason for the alarm is that, within the time set in the timer CURR OVERL, a motor current has been measured continually. This current exceeds the highest of the set point values that have been set in SET POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 for MO-TOR CURR.

Discharge pressure, overloadThe reason for the alarm is that, within the time set in the timer DISCH.PRES, OVERLOAD, a dis-charge pressure level has been measured contin-ually. This pressure level exceeds the warning limit for high discharge pressure.

High motor temperatureThe reason for the alarm is that the input THER-MISTOR is open, ie the load on the input is above 3990 Ω.

Oil pump error (screw compressors)The reason for the alarm is that feedback from the oil pump motor is not set/does not disappear with-in the time set in the timer OIL PUMP M. when the compressor starts/stops (ie the output oil pump start is activated/deactivated), or that feedback from the motor disappears even briefly during op-eration.

The alarm functions as a warning during opera-tion, ie after the prelubrication sequence has been completed.

Oil pump error (SAB 80)The reason for the alarm is that the differential pressure across the mechanical oil pump is too low, ie lower than 0.5 Bar. This value can be set as set point 1 for the oil pressure.

The alarm is delayed 45 seconds after compres-sor start (same timer as for "low oil pressure").

The alarm is only activated when the discharge pressure is lower than 16 Bar. This value can be set as set point 2 for the oil pressure.

At a discharge pressure level of approx 16 Bar, the pump cannot be expected to generate a posi-tive relative pressure because of the shunt valve. There is therefore no alarm surveillance of the dif-ferential pressure across the oil pump.

Full flow pump error (screw compressors)The reason for the alarm is that feedback of the full flow pump motor is not set/does not disappear within the time set in the timer FULL FLOW M, when the motor starts/stops (ie the output full flow pumps start is activated/deactivated), or that feedback from the motor disappears even briefly during operation.

The alarm functions as a warning during opera-tion, ie after the prelubrication sequence has been completed.

Cooling fan errorThe alarm will be activated when feedback from the electrical cooling fan motor is not set/disap-pears within the time limit set in the timer FULL FLOW M. when the motor is started/stopped (ie the cooling fan is activated/deactivated), or when feedback from the motor disappears even briefly during operation.


57/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_428

_en.

fm

Oil rectifier error (screw compressors)The reason for the alarm is that suction gas super-heat has not exceeded the value set in SET POINT 1 before the timer RECT. DISABL has ex-pired, although the OIL RECTIFIER has been set and the compressor is running.

Wrong starting number in sequenceThe reason for the warning is that two or more compressors have got the same starting number and the same system number.

Error in diagnosis - EEPROMThe reason for the alarm is that it has become im-possible to read and write in the serial EPROM (EEPROM) fitted on the CPU card, ie the serial EPROM is either missing or defective.

Limiting suction pressureThe warning indicates that the suction pressure limiter is active, ie the suction pressure is within the limiter neutral zone or below the warning limit.

Limiting discharge pressureThe warning indicates that the discharge pressure limiter is active, ie the discharge pressure is within the limiter neutral zone or above the warning limit.

Limiting brine temperatureThe warning indicates that the brine temperature limiter is active, ie the brine temperatureis within the limiter neutral zone or below the warning limit.

Limiting hot waterThe warning indicates that the hot water tempera-ture limiter is active, ie the hot water temperature is within the limiter neutral zone or above the warning limit.

Limiting discharge temperatureThe warning indicates that the discharge pipe temperature limiter is active. See section Limiting functions, High discharge pipe temperature.

No communication to ChillerThe alarm/warning will only be activated if UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller con-trol, ie as SETUP I CONFIG I CHILLER = YES.

The alarm will only be activated if the communica-tion between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller disappears for a longer period than the one set in the timer NO CHILLER.

Chiller, alarm from ChillerThe alarm will only be activated if UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller control, ie as SETUP I CONFIG I CHILLER = YES.

The alarm will be activated if the alarm of the con-nected Chiller goes off.

Watch the oil pressureThe warning will appear if the oil pump for oil charging is started by means of the pictureTIMERS I OIL CHARGING and the compressor is in operation at the same time.

Vi position error

The alarm will only be activated if UNISAB II is configured for automatic Vi regulation, ie

SETUP I CONFIG I VOLUME RATIO = AUTO

The alarm indicates that the display of capacity in connection with automatic Vi regulation is incor-

rect. The real capacity of the compressor is lower than the one shown in the display.


58/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Evolution, alarm from PLC

Evolution, warning from PLCThe alarm/warning will only appear if UNISAB II is configured as part of an Evolution control, ie as SETUP I CONFIG. I COMMUNICATIONS I PORT 1 = EVOLUTION XXX

The alarm will be activated if the alarm of the con-nected PLC goes off.

Evolution, no communication to PLCThe alarm will only appear if UNISAB II is config-ured as part of an Evolution control, ie as SETUP I CONFIG. I COMMUNICATIONS I PORT 1 = EVOLUTION XXX

The alarm will only be activated if there is no com-munication between UNISAB II and the connect-ed PLC.

Low lubricating pressure monitoring (screw compressor) The reason for this alarm is that the differential pressure across the compressor and thus the ef-fective lubricating pressure is too low. The differ-ential pressure is calculated in the following way: measured oil pressure - 1.1 x suction pressure. The differential pressure must be higher that the set alarm limit for low oil pressure, see the draw-ing below. A warning will be issued after 25 sec-onds and an alarm after 145 seconds.

Fig. 3.2

Pomeasured - 1.1 x P suc < lim AA

B

t1 > 25 sec WARNING

ALARM

RESETt1 = 0

t1 > 145 sec

LOW LUBRICATING PRESSURE

LOW LUBRICATING PRESSURE

Pomeasured = Measured oil pressurelim A = Alarm for low oil pres-sure

t1 = 145 sec fixed

No

yes yes

YesNo

No


59/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_428

_en.

fm

Table 6Identification numbers for alarms / warningsThis is a list of alarms and warnings with identification numbers for both screw and reciprocating compres-sors.

Designation Screw compr. Recipr. compr. Id

Low suction pressure Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 31

High suction pressure Warn only Warn only 32

Low suction gas superheat Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 33

High suction gas superheat Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 34

Low discharge pressure Alrm only Alrm only 35

High discharge pressure Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 36

High discharge temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 37

Low oil pressure (differential pressure) Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 38

Low brine / intermed. gas temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 39

Low discharge temperature Warn only Warn only 40

Low oil temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 41

High oil temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 42

High oil filter differential pressure Warn + alrm 43

Oil system error ( oil flow switch ) Alrm only 44

Capacity error Warn + alrm 1) 45

Compressor motor overload Alrm only Alrm only 46

Compressor motor error/emergency stop/HP Alrm only Alrm only 47

Oil pump error Warn + alrm 2) 4) 48

High motor temperature (thermistor) Alrm only Alrm only 49

PMS error Alrm only Alrm only 55

No starting permission Warn only Warn only 56

High differential pressure (Pc - Pe) Warn + alrm 3) 57

High brine / intermed. gas temperature Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 58

High oil pressure Warn + alrm 59

High intermed. pressure Warn + alrm 60

Low intermed. pressure Warn + alrm 61

Full flow pump error Warn + alrm 2) 62


60/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

63

Oil rectifier error Warn only 64

Wrong starting number in sequence Warn only Warn only 65

Error in diagnosis - EEPROM Alrm only Alrm only 66

Low auxiliary input signal (univ. reg.) Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 67

High auxiliary input signal (univ. reg) Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 68

Low discharge gas superheat Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 69

Discharge gas overload Alrm only Alrm only 70

Evolution, alarm from PLC Alrm only Alrm only 71

Evolution, no communication to PLC Alrm only Alrm only 72

Limiter, suction pressure Warn only Warn only 73

Limiter, discharge pressure Warn only Warn only 74

Limiter, brine temperature Warn only Warn only 75

Limiter, hot water Warn only Warn only 76

Evolution, warning from PLC Warn only Warn only 77

Limiter, discharge temperature Warn only Warn only 78

Watch the oil pressure Warn only 79

Common alarm from Chiller Alrm only Alrm only 80

Chiller, no communication to Chiller Warn + alrm Warn + alrm 81

Cooling fan error Alrm only 82

Vi position error Alrm only 83

Lube press Warn + alarm 84

1) May occur as Warning in MAN and AUTO.

2) Alarm at prelubrication. Warning during operation.

3) Applies only to HPO/HPC.

4) The alarm LOW OIL PUMP PRESSURE DURING OPERATION applies to the SAB 80. The alarm is only activated at a discharge pres-sure level below 16 Bar.

Designation Screw compr. Recipr. compr. Id

4. Timers

61/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

4. TimersUNISAB II includes a number of timer functions under the menu SETUP I TIMERS I .

1. TIMERS - I

This picture includes all the timers and shows which timers are activated (they are counting down).

2.TIMER SETUP - I

In this picture the set values of the timers can be changed. The timers and their functions appear from the following tables for screw compressors and reciprocating compressors respectively. Some of these timers can be changed using the keyboard whereas others are fixed. The tables also include the factory set values.

3. SERVICE COUNTER - I

ON TIME 00 HOURSINCE START 0 sec

On time

Indicates the total operating time of the compres-sor.

Since start

Shows how long time the compressor has been running since it was last started. When stopping the compressor, the counter will stay on the value

reached at that particular moment. In this way it is possible to know for how long the compressor has been running since the last operating period. When the compressor is restarted, the counter be-gins from 0.

4. DATE - TIME - I

This picture shows:

TIME The time in hoursMIN The time in minutesSEC The time in secondsDAY DateMONTH MonthYEAR Year

Must be set correctly in order for the alarms to be stored with the correct time. This function is pro-vided with a battery back-up.

5. OIL CHARGING - I (screw compressor)Provided that the compressor is fitted with a pump for oil charging, this can be started in the picture OIL CHARGING. This picture shows:

To start the pump, proceed as follows:Place the cursor on TIMER with K and use G for parameter changing. Set the time that the pump is to run and place the cursor on START OIL PUMP J which is changed to YES with G and J . Con-firm by pressing G.

The pump will now start and run for the set period. In case the pump is to stop before time expiry, select NO in the top line. The pump will now stop and the time drop to 0.

TIMERS

1 TIMERS

2 TIMER SETUP

3 SERVICE TIMERS

4 DATE-TIMER

5 OIL CHARGING

6 MOTOR FAN

7 P BAND FACTOR

8 TRANSFER

9 TAKE - OVER

START OIL PUMP NO

TIMER 0 sec

4. Timers

62/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

6. MOTOR FAN I (Frequency controlled screw compressor)If the compressor is fitted with an electrical cooling fan for cooling the compressor motor, this can be started manually in the picture COOLING FAN. The function is only available on frequency con-trolled compressors.

The picture shows the following:

To start the cooling fan manually, carry out the fol-lowing:

Place the cursor on TIMER SP with K and press G to change the parameter. Set the fan running time and place the cursor on START COOLING FAN. Select YES with G,and J . Enter setting with G .

The cooling fan will now start and operate for the set running time.

To stop the cooling fan before the end of the running time, select NO in the upper line. The fan will now stop and the time be reset to 0.

START COOLING FAN NO

TIMER SP 10 sec

TIMER 0 sec

4. Timers

63/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

Table 7 - Screw compressors

No Value Factory Low High Unit Adjust-able

1 Start-start delay 1200 600 3600 Sec Yes

2 Stop-start delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes

3 Start delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes

4 Stop delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes

5 Suction ramp 0 0 1200 Sec Yes

6 Slide max 300 60 600 Sec Yes

7 Prelub1)/2)/3)/4)/5)/6) 10/60/0/6/50 0 120 Sec Yes

8 Oil flow1)/2)/3)/4)/5) 600/90/60/120/600 -- -- Sec No

9 Oil flow delay 1)/2)/3) 50/0/20 - - - - Sec No

10 No oil/flow 1)/2) 10/2/60 - - Sec No

11 Lubrication time/flow 1)/2) 60/300 - - Sec No

12 Diff press OK 60 - - Sec No

13 Oil press low 1)/2) 45/300 - - Sec No

14 Filter diff high 300 - - Sec No

15 Oil temp low 300 - - Sec No

16 Oil temp high 300 - - Sec No

17 Superheating low 300 - - Sec No

18 Superheating high 300 - - Sec No

19 Disch press overload 300 - - Sec No

20 Current overload 300 - - Sec No

21 Motor start 15 5 120 Sec Yes

22 PMS feedback 60 10 300 Sec Yes

23 F.F. Pump start 10 5 30 Sec Yes

24 Oil pump start 10 5 30 Sec Yes

25 Oil rectifier start 900 0 3600 Sec Yes

26 Oil rectifier delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes

27 Oil rectifier disable 3600 0 7200 Sec Yes

28 Start high pressure 30 0 120 Sec Yes

29 No Chiller 10 - - Sec No

4. Timers

64/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

30 Cap. negative 10000 60 20000 Sec Yes

31 Start unload 15 0 60 Sec Yes

32 Low suction pressure 0 0 60 Sec Yes

33 Lubricating pressure 145 - - Sec No

34 Vi-pause 60 - - Sec No


4. Timers

65/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

Table 8 - Reciprocating compressors


1 Start-start delay 1200 600 3600 Sec Yes

2 Stop-start delay 300 60 3600 Sec Yes

3 Start delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes

4 Stop delay 300 5 3600 Sec Yes

5 Suction ramp 0 0 1200 Sec Yes

6 Delay up 60 5 1200 Sec Yes

7 Delay down 60 5 1200 Sec Yes

8 Take-over max 0 0 3600 Sec Yes

9 Take-over delay 300 300 300 Sec No

10 Intermediate pressure low 20 - - Sec No

11 Filter diff. high 300 - - - - Sec No

12 Not used - - - - - - - - - -

13 Oil pressure low 60 - - Sec No

14 Oil pressure high 20 - - Sec No

15 Oil temp low 300 - - Sec No

16 Oil temp high 0 - - Sec No

17 Superheating low 15 - - Sec No

18 Superheating high 300 - - Sec No

19 Disch pressure overload 300 - - Sec No

20 Current overload 300 - - Sec No

21 Motor start 15 5 120 Sec Yes

22 PMS feedback 60 10 300 Sec Yes

23 Oil cool on 60 60 1500 Sec Yes

24 Oil return 0 0 1200 Sec Yes

25 Oil rectifier start 900 0 3600 Sec Yes

26 Oil rectifier delay 300 0 3600 Sec Yes

27 Oil rectifier disable 3600 0 7200 Sec Yes

28 Start high pressure 30 0 120 Sec Yes

29 No Chiller 10 - - Sec No

4. Timers

66/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Timer description

Screw compressors

1. Start-start delayStates the number of seconds that must pass from one compressor start to the next. If the compres-sor stops before the timer has counted down to 0, the timer will block restart.

2. Stop-start delayStates the number of seconds that must pass be-fore the compressor can be restarted after stop. This function is not used in MANUAL mode.

3. Start delay

When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE, the compressor start will be delayed for the stated number of seconds.

4. Stop delay When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE and the compressor is below 5% slide stop posi-tion, the timer will start counting down and stop the compressor at 0.

5. Suction ramp

This timer indicates how fast the compressor is al-lowed to lower its suction pressure 1°C. The func-tion is active as long as the compressor is working itself down to its normal working point. When this has been reached, the compressor will be regulat-ed according to the set regulating values.

Used only in case of suction pressure regulation.

If the value is set at 0, this function is disconnect-ed.

6. Slide max At compressor stop the capacity slide will move towards minimum position. In case it fails to get below 5% within the set time, an error message will be issued.

If UNISAB II tries to move the slide during opera-tion, and the slide refuses to move within the set time, an error message will appear.

7. PrelubricationWhen starting compressors with prelubrication pumps, the prelubrication time is calculated from the time when the oil float issues a signal.

1) For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3.

2) For SAB 163 Mk1.

3) For SV 10/20, FV 10/20, SAB 110 SR/LR, SAB 128 HR and SAB 163 HR.

4) For SAB 283, SAB 355, GSV, RWF and SAB 330 B

5) For SAB 330 HP (B is short for Booster, which can be selected in the CONFIG menu. HP means Booster = NO).

6) For Rotatune compressors the time must be changed from 10 sec. to 0 sec.

30 Not used - - - - -

31 Not used - - - - -

32 Low suction pressure 0 0 60 Sec Yes

33 Not used - - - - -

34 Not used


4. Timers

67/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

8. Oil flowWhen prelubrication is initiated, a signal must be issued from the float switch before the timer ex-pires; otherwise an error message appears.

1) For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3.

2) For SAB 163 Mk1.

3) For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20

4) For SAB 283, SAB 355, GSV, RWF and SAB 330 B

5) For SAB 330 HP (B is short for Booster, which can be selected in the CONFIG menu. HP means Booster = NO).

9. Oil flow switch delay, start

When starting a compressor, a time delay ensures that the oil float has time to lift.

1. For SAB Mk 2 110/128/163 and SAB 80.

2. For compressors with prelubrication delay = 0 sec.

3. For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20

10. No oil/flowDuring operation the oil float is allowed to be dis-connected only for the period stated.

1. For SAB and VMY compressors.

2. For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20

3. For GSV/RWF

11. Lubrication time/flowAfter start-up of compressors with prelubrication pump, the pump will run for the time stated after compressor start.

1. For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3, SV 10/20 and FV 10/20

2. For SAB 163 Mk1.

12. Diff. pressure OKFor VMY Mk3, SAB Mk3, SAB 202, SV 10/20 and FV 10/20 the oil pump will run for the stated time

after the desired differential pressure has been reached.

13. Oil pressure lowDuring start the alarm for low oil pressure is de-layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

1. For SAB 202, SAB Mk2, SAB Mk3, VMY, SAB 80, SV 10/20 and FV 10/20.

2. For SAB 163 Mk 1

14. Filter diff. high

During start and operation the alarm for high filter differential pressure is delayed for the stated time.

15. Oil temp. lowDuring start the alarm for low oil temperature is delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

16. Oil temp. highDuring start the alarm for high oil temperature is delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

17. Superheating low

During start the alarm for low superheating is de-layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

18. Superheating highDuring start the alarm for high superheating is de-layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

19. Disch. pressure, overload

If the discharge pressure is higher than the warn-ing limit in the time stated, the compressor will stop and an error message will appear.

See also Limiters.

20. Current overloadIf the motor current is higher than the set point in the time stated, the compressor will stop and an error message will appear.

4. Timers

68/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

See also Limiters.

21. Motor start

When the compressor starts, the motor guard must issue a feedback before the timer expires; if not, an error message will appear.

The green light diode above the starting key A will flash until feedback has been received whereup-on the light will be steady.

22. PMS (Starting request) feedback

After the control has issued a starting request, it must receive a feedback within the stated time; if not, an error message will appear.

23. F. F. Pump startIn case the motor guard of the full flow pump has failed to issue a feedback within the stated time af-ter the starting signal, an error message will ap-pear.

24. Oil pump startIn case the motor guard of the oil pump has failed to issue a feedback within the stated time after the starting signal, an error message will appear.

25. Oil rectifier start

Whenever the compressor starts, this timer will be activated and start counting down. When 0 has been reached, the solenoid valve to the oil rectifier will be activated.

26. Oil rectifier delayIf suction gas superheating drops below set point 1 for superheating, the solenoid valve will close. Once the superheating rises above this limit again, the timer must expire before the solenoid valve opens.

27. Oil rectifier disableIf suction gas superheating drops below set point 1 for superheating, the timer will start counting down. Provided the superheating still remains be-low the limit once the timer has reached 0, a warn-ing will be issued to a superior computer.

28. Start high pressureOn two-stage plants the HP compressors can be started by force by activating the input External starting permission, normal stop.

The start will be delayed for the set number of sec-onds.

With the compressors in sequence, number 1 in the sequence will start and the system will now operate normally.

29. No Chiller

When UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller control, the timer will ensure that communication between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller does not disappear for a period longer period than the set time. If this happens, both UNISAB II and UNISAB II-Chiller will be stopped by the alarm.

30. Cap. negativeWhen the compressor is started, the slide must move to the position corresponding to the set zero point (ie positive read capacity) as quickly as pos-sible before the expiry of the cap. negative timer. Otherwise an error message will be issued. The cap. negative timer counts down each second by the value: (corrected capacity)2/5, where corrected

capacity may be negative values between -0 and -30%, ie the timer will count down each second by a factor between 1 and 180.

Each time the slide moves above 0% capacity, the timer will stop.

The timer is reset and restarted, as soon as the slide moves below -2% corrected capacity.

31. Unloaded start

The timer is used in connection with the compres-sors FV 17/19. When the compressor motor is started, a by-pass solenoid valve for oil discharge will open for the time set.

The timer is used in connection with the compres-sors FV 24/26. When the compressor motor is

4. Timers

69/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

started and stopped, the slide capacity down sole-noid valve will open for the time set.

32. Low suction pressureDuring start-up and operation the alarm for low suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-od of time.

33. Lubricating pressure

During start-up and operation the alarm for low suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-od of time. A warning is issued after 25 seconds.

34. Vi-pauseThe timer is used in connection with GST com-pressors, which have a three-stage automatic regulation of the volume ratio, 2.2-3.5-5.0. Before switching from one Vi-step to another, the actual Vi ratio for the compressor must have been present for at least the indicated time other wise the change of the Vi step will be cancelled.

Reciprocating compressors

1. Start-start delay States the number of seconds that must pass from one compressor starts to the next. If the compres-sor stops before the timer has reached 0, the timer will block restart.

2. Stop-start delay

States the number of seconds that must pass be-fore the compressor can be restarted after stop. This function is not used in MANUAL mode.

3. Start delay When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE, the compressor start will be delayed for the stated number of seconds.

4. Stop delay

When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE, and the compressor is at its lowest capacity stage,

the timer will start counting down and stop the compressor at 0.

5. Suction ramp This timer indicates how fast the compressor is al-lowed to lower its suction pressure1°C/R. If the value is set for 0, this function will be disconnect-ed.

6. Delay up

Indicates the time that passes between the load-ing of stages at increasing capacity in AUTOMAT-IC or REMOTE mode.

7. Delay down Indicates the time that passes between the un-loading of stages at decreasing capacity in AUTO-MATIC or REMOTE mode.

8. Take-over max

Only used in connection with MULTISAB. See this instruction manual.

9. Take-over delay

Only used in connection with MULTISAB. See this instruction manual.

10. Intermediate pressure lowDuring start the alarm for low intermediate pres-sure is delayed for the stated time. No delay dur-ing normal operation.

11. Filter diff. high

1. SMC Mk4; during start-up and operation, the warning for high oil filter differential pres-sure is delayed for the indicated period of time.

2. For SMC Mk3 and earlier versions, this tim-er is not used.

12. Not used

13. Oil pressure lowDuring start and operation the alarm for low oil pressure is delayed for the stated time.

4. Timers

70/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

14. Oil pressure highDuring start the alarm for high oil pressure is de-layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

15. Oil temperature low

During start the alarm for low oil temperature is delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

16. Oil temp highDuring start the alarm for high oil temperature is delayed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

17. Superheating low

During start the alarm for low superheating is de-layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

18. Superheating highDuring start the alarm for high superheating is de-layed for the stated time. No delay during nor-mal operation.

19. Disch. pressure, overload

In case the discharge pressure is higher than the warning limit within the stated time, the compres-sor will stop.

20. Current overloadIn case the motor current is higher than the set point within the stated time, the compressor will stop.

21. Motor start

When the compressor starts, the motor guard must issue a feedback before the timer expires; if not, an error message will appear.

22. PMS (Starting request) feedbackAfter the control has issued a starting request, it must receive a feedback within the stated time; if not, an error message will appear.

23. Oil cool onAt compressor stop the outlet for water cooling or oil cooling will not close until after the set time has run out.

24. Oil return

At compressor start the outlets for oil return are not opened until after the set time has run out.

25. Oil rectifier startWhenever the compressor starts, the timer will be activated and start counting down. When 0 has been reached, the solenoid valve to the oil rectifier will be activated.

26. Oil rectifier delay

If the suction gas superheating drops below set point 1 for superheating, the solenoid valve will close. Once the superheating rises above this limit again, the timer must expire before the solenoid valve opens.

27. Oil rectifier disable

If suction gas superheating drops below set point 1 for superheating, the timer will start counting down. Provided the superheating still remains be-low the limit once the timer has reached 0, a war-ning will be issued to a superior computer.

28. Start high pressureOn two-stage plants the HP compressors can be started by force by activating the input External starting permission, normal stop. The start will be delayed for the set number of seconds.

With the compressors in sequence, number 1 in the sequence will start and the system will now operate normally.

29. No Chiller When UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller control, this timer will ensure that the communica-tion between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller does not disappear for a period longer than the set

4. Timers

71/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

time. If this occurs, both UNISAB II and UNISAB II-Chiller will be stopped by the alarm.

30. Not used

31. Not used

32. Low suction pressure

During start-up and operation the alarm for low suction pressure is delayed for the indicated peri-od of time.

33. Not used

34. Not used.

7. P BAND FACTOR - I

In case of a screw compressor, the following picture will appear:

Start delay

Start delay can be changed in the range from 1 to 100. Stop delay can be changed in the range from 0 to 100. The function of these zones must be seen in connection with the applied regulator (suc-tion pressure, brine, etc).

If the value 1 is selected, the timer will not start to count until the measured value of the regulator is 1% inside the proportional band above the neutral zone.

If the value 100 is selected, the timer will not start to count until the measured value of the regulator is 100% inside the proportional band above the neutral zone.

Whether 1% or 100% is selected, the timer - when it is started - will count in seconds without exten-sion (this is not the case with reciprocating com-pressors, see next section).

Stop delayIf the value 0 is selected, the timer will start to count when the measured value of the regulator is in the neutral zone.

If the value 1 is selected, the timer will not start to count until the measured value of the regulator is 1% inside the proportional band below the neutral zone.

If the value 100 is selected, the timer will not start to count until the measured value of the regulator is 100% inside the proportional band below the neutral zone.

Sp = Set pointNz = Neutral zonePb = Proportional band

Example 1:

UNISAB II has been set for suction pressure reg-ulation,Sp = -10 °C,Nz = 2 K, Pb = 10 K, START DELAY = 90 sec and FACTOR = 50.

STOP DELAY = 60 sec and FACTOR = 30.

In the neutral zone and up to -4°C the compressor will not be in operation. If the measured suction pressure is a little higher than -4°C, the START DELAY timer will start counting and the compres-sor will start after 90 seconds. If necessary, a compressor start can thus be delayed or blocked.

In the neutral zone and up to -14°C the compres-sor will be in operation. If the measured suction pressure is a little lower than -14°C and the capac-ity slide is below 5%, the STOP DELAY timer will start counting and the compressor will stop after 60 seconds.

Example 2:UNISAB II has been set for suction pressure change,Sp = -20 °C,

START DELAY 1

STOP DELAY 0

4. Timers

72/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Nz = 4K, Pb = 10 K,START DELAY = 90 sec and FACTOR = 10.

STOP DELAY = 60 sec and FACTOR = 0.

In the neutral zone and up to -17°C the compres-sor will not be in operation. If the measured suc-tion pressure is a little higher than -17°C, the START DELAY timer will start to count and the compressor will start after 90 seconds. If neces-sary, a compressor start can thus be delayed or blocked.

As long as the measured suction pressure is in the upper proportional band, the compressor will be in operation. If the measured suction pressure is a little lower than -18°C and the capacity slide is be-low 5%, the STOP DELAY timer will start to count and the compressor will stop after 60 seconds.

In case of a reciprocating compressor, the fol-lowing picture will appear:

Each of these factors can be selected in the range 1-10.

In AUTO and REMOTE mode, the various P BAND FACTORs are influencing the decision of when to start or stop the compressor or, for recip-rocating compressors, when to engage or disen-gage another capacity stage.

Basically, starting and stopping as well as engag-ing and disengaging are delayed by the timers START DELAY, STOP DELAY, DELAY UP and DELAY DOWN. See section Timer description. The relevant timers start as soon as the regulated input (eg suction pressure) is just outside the neu-tral zone.

There is one P BAND FACTOR for each of these timers.

If the P BAND FACTOR is 1, the time delay will be the same no matter if the regulated input is just outside the neutral zone or far outside the neutral zone.

By selecting a P BAND FACTOR higher than 1 (up to 10), it is possible to have the timer run slow-er when the regulated input is close to the neutral zone as illustrated in the drawing.

Fig. 4.1

When the regulated input is outside the P band (PB), the timer will run at normal speed, as it is counting in seconds. When the regulated input is

just outside the neutral zone (NZ), each count-down will last one PBF second.

DELAY UP 1

DELAY DOWN 1

START DELAY 1

STOP DELAY 1

0

1

Diff

PBNZ-NZ-PB

PBF = P.Band Factor

Diff = Measuring value - Setpoint

PBF

Timer step [sec]

4. Timers

73/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

In this way, a compressor start can be delayed or blocked if there is no particular cooling require-ment. However, if the deviation is large, the timer will count down fast and start the compressor.

Example 1:

Suction pressure regulation has been selected. The measured suction pressure equals the set point. The compressor is stopped and ready to start.Set point Sp = -10°C/RNz = 2°C/RPb = 5°C/RSTART DELAY = 60 secP BAND FACTOR START DELAY = 5.

When the measured suction pressure exceeds -9°C/R, the START DELAY timer will begin to count with an interval of 5 sec (P BAND FACTOR) each time the value in the display counts one down. If the pressure steadies, the timer will run for 5 x 60 = 300 seconds.

Should the measuring value reach -6.5°C/R, the counting interval will be 3 sec.

If the pressure is still moving upwards and ex-ceeds -4°C/R (the Pb limit), the timer will count in seconds.

The resulting total delay will range between 60 and 300 seconds, after which the compressor will start.

Example 2:Discharge pressure regulation has been selected on a reciprocating compressor. The measured discharge pressure equals the set point. The com-pressor is running at 100% capacity.Set point Sp = 30°C/RNz = 2°C/RPb = 5°C/RDELAY DOWN = 30 secP BAND FACTOR DELAY DOWN = 3.

When the measured discharge pressure exceeds 31°C/R, the timer DELAY DOWN will begin to count with an interval of 3 sec (P BAND FACTOR) each time the value in the display counts one down. If the pressure steadies, the timer will run for 3 x 30 = 90 seconds.

Should the measuring value reach 33.5°C/R, the counting interval will be 2 sec.

If the pressure is still moving upwards and ex-ceeds 36°C/R (the Pb limit), the timer will count in seconds.

The resulting total delay will range between 30 and 90 seconds, after which the compressor will disengage one capacity stage.

Special timers in connection with MULTISABReciprocating compressorsIn the MULTISAB system which regulates and op-timizes more than one compressor, there are a number of factors attached to a TRANS-FER/TAKE-OVER function between reciprocating and screw compressors. These factors are de-scribed in detail in section MULTISAB regulation.

The factors are found in the pictures:

8.TRANSFER - I Reciprocating compressors

9.TAKE-OVER - I Reciprocating compressors

FACTOR DOWN 1

ZONE 15%

FACTOR UP 1

FACTOR START 1

ZONE 15%

4. Timers

74/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

MULTISABMULTISAB is a distributed compressor control system, which is very useful when more compres-sors are working together (eg connection to the same suction line). With MULTISAB it is possible to start, stop and capacity regulate compressors according to the varying cooling requirements. MULTISAB is a standard function in UNISAB II. MULTISAB is described in detail in section MUL-TISAB regulation.

MULTISAB is only able to work if all UNISAB II units which are to participate in the distributed control are physically connected via the Danbuss communication network. The section Installation of data communication cable describes how to connect the units.

If MULTISAB is to function optimally, it is of vital importance that certain key parameters are se-lected correctly by the user as explained in section MULTISAB regulation. To understand the con-tents of the MULTISAB pictures, the following key parameters are described here: COMPR. NO, SYSTEM NO, PREF. MASTER, START NO and CONTROL MODE.

Always make sure that all UNISAB II units on a network have different COMPR. NOs, ie two units are not allowed to have the same COMPR. NO. See section Configuration.

SYSTEM NO informs MULTISAB which com-pressors are to work together. The drawing below shows two examples.

Fig. 4.2

In the example to the left, two separate compres-sor plants are connected on a common Danbuss network. Here it is of vital importance that

• UNISAB No 1 has the same SYSTEMNO as UNISAB No 2

• UNISAB No 3 has the same SYSTEM NO as UNISAB No 4

• SYSTEM NO of UNISAB 1 and 2 differs from SYSTEM NO of UNISAB 3 and 4.

Suction line, subplant 1

SYSTEM NO = 1

CommonMultisabnetwork

Multisabnetwork

Separated compressor plants Common compressor plant

Suction line, subplant 2

SYSTEM NO = 2

SYSTEM NO= 1 or 2

SYSTEM NO= 1 or 2

SYSTEM NO= 1 or 2

SYSTEM NO = 2

Suction main line 2

SYSTEM NO = 1

Suction main line 1

SYSTEM NO= 1 or 2

Compr. 1

Compr. 2

Compr. 3

Compr. 4

Compr. 1

Compr. 2

Compr. 3

Compr. 4

4. Timers

75/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

In the example to the right, each of the four com-pressors can be connected independently to any of the two suction main lines. In this example is is also important that SYSTEM NO is correct. How-ever, it is particularly important that when chang-ing the valve settings, the SYSTEM NO in the UNISAB II units in question is changed according-ly as this does not take place automatically.

START NO defines the priority of the compres-sors with common SYSTEM NO. The unit with the lowest START NO will be the first to start.

PREF. MASTER must be indentical for all units with the same SYSTEM NO. See section Config-uration. PREF. MASTER specifies whether it is COMPR. NO or START NO which is to define which UNISAB II is to be SYS CONTROLLER.

SYS CONTROLLER is responsible for the co-or-dination of the involved units. It is the sensor of the SYS CONTROLLER (eg suction pressure input) which is used for the regulation.

If PREF. MASTER = #COMPR, the unit with the lowest COMPR. NO will be SYS CONTROLLER except if the UNISAB II unit in question is shut off or otherwise unable to communicate. In such cas-es the unit with the next COMPR. NO will take over as SYS CONTROLLER.

If PREF. MASTER = #START, the unit with the lowest START NO will be SYS CONTROLLER, but only as long as it is available. If it is not avail-able, the unit with the next START NO will take over as SYS CONTROLLER. A unit is not availa-ble if it is shut off, not communicating, not in RE-MOTE mode or in shutdown alarm condition. An

alarm condition may be due to a sensor error, re-sulting in a change of SYS CONTROLLER and thus of sensor.

In order for a compressor to become part of a MULTISAB system, the above key parameters must be set up. CONTROL MODE must be set for REMOTE. In other words, by changing the CON-TROL MODE, the user is able to include and ex-clude the compressor from the MULTISAB sys-tem. See section Compressor regulation.

The MULTISAB functions are found in the menu SETUP I MULTISAB I

1. MULTISAB STATE - I

Here START NO and SYSTEM NO can be adjust-ed in the range 1-14. Furthermore, SYS CON-TROLLER shows which unit is the master as ex-plained above.

In the fourth line of the picture, the MULTISAB status of the UNISAB II in question is shown. The status can be one of the following:

MULTISAB

MULTISAB STATE

ALL COMPRESSORS

PARALLEL CONTR.

START NO 1

SYSTEM NO 1

SYS. CONTROLLER 1

MAY START

State Explanation

BLOCKED The compressor cannot (and is not going to) start MULTISAB now.

NOT MY TURN Another compressor must start before this one / there is no cooling requirement.

MAY START Starts when START DELAY expires as there is now a cooling requirement.

4. Timers

76/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

2. ALL COMPRESSORS - I

This picture makes it possible - from a UNISAB II unit - to see MULTISAB information about the oth-er compressors in the communication network.

COMPR. #

The number of the observed UNISAB II unit. In this example it is compressor no 01.

Control mode

Operating mode of compressor no 01. In this ex-ample compressor no. 01 is in MANUAL mode. Control mode be one of the following: STOPPED, MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE.

SYSTEM # SYSTEM NO of compressor no 01.

START #START NO of compressor no 01.

StatusCompressor operating status of compressor no. 01. Operating status can be one of the following:

Capacity Capacity of compressor no 1.

RUNS AT MAX CAP Must run at 100% capacity.

LEAD COMPR. Runs in parallel operation as master.

LAG COMPR. Runs in parallel operation as slave.

MAY STOP Is below 5% capacity, stops when STOP DELAY expires.

RUNS BY ITSELF Is the only compressor in the system that is in operation.

STOP RAMP UP Stops parallel operation, as master - only screw compr.

STOP RAMP DOWN Stops parallel operation, as slave - only screw compr.

State Explanation

COMPR. # 01 MANUAL

SYSTEM # 01

START # 02

READY 0%

State Explanation

READY UNISAB II is ready to start.

RUNNING Compressor in operation.

STARTING Compressor motor start-up.

SHUTDOWN In a state of alarm.

PAUSE Waiting for a timer to expire.

PRELUB Working on the prelubrication sequence.

CAP SLIDE DOWN Runs the slide down after stop.

RUNS AT OVERL. Motor current too high.

DISCHARGE LIM. Discharge pressure too high.

SUCTION LIM. Suction pressure too low.

STOPPED Compressor cannot start.

4. Timers

77/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_429

_en.

fm

The picture can of course be used for getting an overall view of the MULTISAB operation of the plant.

It may also be used for testing whether the com-munication between the UNISAB II units on the network is working. In case there is no communi-cation to one of the UNISAB II units, the status field in line 4 will be replaced by a "?".

3. PARALLEL CONTR. - I

This picture shows the numbers of the compres-sors which come before and after this compressor in the starting sequence and which can start. The last two lines only apply to screw compressors.

PRECEDINGThe number of the compressor that comes before this compressor in the starting sequence - (lower START NO).

NEXTThe number of the compressor which is next in the starting sequence - (higher START NO)

FOLLOWING

The number of the compressor which follows the next compressor in the starting sequence (an even higher START NO).

PARALLEL CAPThe percentage at which MULTISAB is going to stop this compressor, when this compressor is one of the two screw compressors that run in par-allel.

OFFSET

Can be set between 0.0% and -20.0%. The OFF-SET value is added to the calculation of PARAL-LEL CAP. After entering an OFFSET value (not 0), the PARALLEL CAP value will be reduced ac-cordingly. This means that the point at which the lag (screw) compressor is stopped is reduced by the OFFSET value. This may be useful when wa-ter chillers are running in parallel as these units may have a relatively better COP at part load (heat transfer being better at part load). Note that the OFFSET value is not changed by a FACTORY RESET.

PRECEDING 2

NEXT 3

FOLLOWING 0

PARALLEL CAP 45.0 %

OFFSET -10.0 %

4. Timers

78/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

5. Compressor regulation

79/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm


Control mode The compressor can be adjusted for different modes of operation. These are found in SETUP I CONTROL I .

When this picture is selected, the cursor will be positioned in the top line. Press G and the cursor moves to the second line.

Select the desired mode of operation with J K. There are the following possibilities:

• STOPPED• MANUAL• AUTO • REMOTE

STOPPED means that the compressor is blocked and thus cannot start.

MANUAL means that the compressor only oper-ates manually, ie it is not possible to change to an-other mode by means of C .

The compressor can, however, be started with A and stopped with B. Capacity is increased/de-creased with E F.

AUTO means that the compressor runs in local automatic operation according to the form of reg-ulation chosen (suction pressure, brine, etc). It is possible to change to MANUAL with C.

REMOTE means that the compressor works to-gether with one or more compressors in a com-mon MULTISAB control system.

RegulatorsUNISAB II includes a number of compressor ca-pacity regulators. In the modes AUTO and RE-

MOTE, one (and only one) of these regulators is responsible for adjusting the capacity according to the cooling (or heating) requirements. Which reg-ulator to use is specified in Pos. 3: CONTROL ON in the menu CONFIG. See section Configuration. CONTROL ON can be set to one of the following:

• SUCTION • BRINE• DISCHARGE• HOT WATER• EXT.COOL• EXT.HEAT

Each regulator has its own set of parameters. This means that when changing the CONTROL ON setting from one regulator to another and back again, the original parameters are kept.

The common regulator parameter set includes: Set point (SP), Neutral zone (Nz) and Propor-tional band (Pb or P Band). On screw compres-sors PID parameters are also used. See section PID controller below.

Set point is the pressure or the temperature de-sired in the plant.

Neutral zone indicates how much the pressure or the temperature is allowed to fluctuate in relation to the Sp without the compressor changing its ca-pacity. The set value of Nz is positioned symmet-rically around the set point (Sp +/- 1/2 Nz).

Proportional band indicates how powerful the regulating signal to the compressor capacity reg-ulation is going to be, depending on the difference between the desired value (Sp) and the actual val-ue.

In case the measured value is just outside the Nz, the regulating impulses will be very short, where-as the regulating impules will be very long if the

COMPRESSOR CONTROL

STOPPED


80/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

measured value is outside the P Band. The P Band is positioned symmetrically around Sp out-side the Nz.

Fig. 5.1

Screw compressorsScrew compressors are capacity regulated (hy-draulically or electrically) by moving the capacity slide. This takes place via two digital outputs which are controlled by UNISAB II, so that the slide moves towards max or min capacity accord-ing to demand. The setting is stageless from 0 to 100%. UNISAB II will usually pulse the digital out-puts with a pulse/delay ratio. Consequently, a constant up or down signal will rarely be given.

The capacity control must be seen as two PID control loops.

The inner loop adjusts the slide position continu-ously according to the manually or automatically selected capacity set point. As long as this set point is constant, the inner loop will ensure that the capacity slide remains in this position, inde-

pendent of any other outside influence on the ca-pacity slide.

When active, the outer loop will adjust the capac-ity set point according to the selected control set point and measured value, eg the suction pres-sure set point and measurement. In MANUAL mode, the outer loop is not active. In AUTO, the outer loop is active according to the CONTROL ON setting. See section Regulators.

The inner loop set point can also be controlled via the external input (see section Set point control with current input) or via the communication net-work.

Inner loop parameters are set in picture SETUP I CAPACITY I CAPACITY. The picture includes the standard PID parameters and the points de-scribed in section PID controller below. Addition-ally the following parameters can be selected:

rapidly up

Very slowly up

SPP.Band

NZ

P.Band

Very slowly down

rapidly down

Error signal


81/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

• MIN PULSE is the shortest pulse that UNISAB II will give on the relay output, eg it takes time for a hydraulicvalve to open and close, and for the hydraulic oil to move, so a pulse shorter than about half a second would have no effect and would only short-en the service life of the valve and the relay. A longer MIN PULSE increases the service life of the hardware, but it also makes the regulation less accurate.

• RUN TIME is the approximate time it takes for the capacity slide to move from minimum position to maximum position and vice versa at constant signal. Please note that RUN TIME for the capacity slide may be reduced by variable slide end stop etc where this is relevant.

Outer loop parameters are set in the relevant pic-ture, eg SUCTION I SUCT. PRESS. The picture includes the standard PID parameters and the points described in section PID controller below.

The automatic Vi slide control works in the same way as the inner loop. The parameters are availa-ble in picture CAPACITY I VI POSITION.

PID controllerOn screw compressors a PID controller is used for capacity control and possible Vi control. The the-ory of PID controllers is described in numerous books on automatic control. Methods of optimiz-ing the parameters are also included in these books. The available parameters are described briefly in the following.

In the relevant picture, eg SUCTION I SUCT. PRESS., the following data are included:

Name Description

ACTUAL SP. The set point which the PID controller works with at the moment.

SET POINT 1 User selected set point 1

SET POINT 2 User selected set point 2

NEUTRAL ZONE The neutral zone is a symmetrical area around ACTUAL SP. When the controlled val-ue is inside the area, the controller will be passive. The purpose is to increase service life of the output hardware (relays, valves, spindle motor, etc). However, with the PID controller this is handled by MIN PULSE, so that the NEUTRAL ZONE should be set for 0. A larger NEUTRAL ZONE makes the regulation less accurate.

PROP. BAND This parameter decides the total gain in the control loop, as the gain K=n / (PROP. BAND) where n is a constant that depends on RUN TIME. Thus changing PROP. BAND does not only affect the proportional term, but also the integral and differential terms. Increasing PROP. BAND will give a slower response.

T. INT. Integral Time decides the gain of the integral term. A smaller T. INT means a larger gain, ie the controller will try to reach the set point faster.

T. DIFF. Differential Time decides the gain of the differential term. A larger T. DIFF means a larger gain. Normally select T. DIFF = 0 as it is then working as a PI controller.

P. PART This field shows the actual Proportional term calculated by the PID controller.

I. PART This field shows the actual Integral term calculated by the PID controller.


82/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

PID regulatorWith version 2.01, the PID regulator was intro-duced to replace the previous “three-point I regu-lator”. It is very important that the parameters ap-pearing by a factory reset be used.

There are both an inner and an outer loop. As re-gards the outer loop, it is not recommended to ad-just the P band further down than 10°C and T.INT. further down than 20 seconds. Higher values may very well occur. T.DIFF. is usually always 0. The neutral zone can be set for 0.4°C or higher if it is not required that the suction pressure is kept as narrow as possible around the set point. If the neutral zone is too high, the regulator may fluctu-ate too much.

As regards the inner loop it is recommended only to use the default values for neutral zone (0.0), P band (200%), T.INT. (30 seconds) and T.DIFF. (0 seconds)..The parameter MIN PULSE determines the pulse duration up or down every time the sole-noid valve is activated. If the value is high, a cor-respondingly large capacity change is required before the regulator reacts with an up or down sig-nal. This is a kind of neutral zone. Default value is 0.5 seconds and should not be higher than 2 sec-onds.

The parameter RUN TIME defines how long it will take to run the slide from 0-100% at constant up signal or from 100-0% at constant down signal. Usually slide speed is always adjusted on the oil needle valves positioned on the capacity regulat-ing block so that the slide speed is approx 60 sec-onds when the oil is warm from operation. This ad-justment is usually carried out by the service engi-neer who starts up the compressor unit.

If the slide speed for some reason cannot be ad-justed for 60 seconds, the RUN TIME parameter must be changed so that run time corresponds to the actual operating conditions. If this is not done, it will appear as if the PID regulator is out of con-trol, ie it will increase capacity when it should de-crease capacity as well as go far beyond its set-point.

If it is necessary to set the RUN TIME value higher than 60 seconds, YORK Refrigeration recom-mends increasing the integral-time (T.INT) corre-spondingly. Do not, however, use a T.INT. higher than 120 seconds as this may prevent the capa-city slide from reaching 100%. A T.INT increase informs the system that slide function is slower than expected.

Example 1Screw compressor with a combination of slide regulation and frequency regulation.

Slide velocity is 60 seconds from 0-100% slide movement. This may be shown as 0-42% capacity on the UNISAB II display. When the slide has reached 100%, the frequency converter will start to increase the frequency to the max frequency set. This will take 60 seconds and be shown as 42-100% in the UNISAB II display. Thus the RUN TIME parameter must be set for 60+60=120 sec-onds for correct regulation.

When switching between manual and automatic control, another difference between the PID regu-lator and the previous regulator can be seen. A suction pressure level which is much higher than the set point will produce a very high output signal from the regulator.

D. PART This field shows the actual Differential term calculated by the PID controller

REG. OUTPUT The actual Regulator Output is the sum of P. PART, I. PART and D. PART.

Name Description


83/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

If switching from manual to auto and back again rather quickly, the regulator will have produced a very large output signal when regulating in auto. This signal may make the regulator unstable in case the setting of the oil valves mentioned above is incorrect. If the regulator becomes unstable, keep control mode in manual until the regulator has stabilized (without activating the capacity up and down keys).

Example 2Nz = 0.0

P band = 10.0 T. I NT. = 60.0T. DI FF. = 0.0

In case the compressor is running very unsteadily during regulation or two compressors cannot find one another in parallel operation, raise the P band to eg. 50°C.

If the running of the compressor has steadied, but the regulator seems slow to reach its set point, re-duce the P band a little at a time until the running

of the compressor becomes unsteady again. Now raise the P band to the last applicable value. If the suction pressure still does not reach its setpoint (depending on the setting of Nz) a reduction in the integral-time can be necessary to fine-tune the regulator.

If the regulator during a long period of time seems to hunt, increase the T. INT. to eg. 100-200 sec. If the hunting stops, reduce the T. INT. until the sys-tem starts hunting again. Now increase the T. INT. to the last applicable value.

Usually it will never be necessary to change the T. DIFF. to another value than 0 sec. However, in special cases where the compressor is part of a process plant, eg. in petrochemical plants, it may be necessary to use another value than 0 sec. This will only be necessary if the process requires a very fast regulation upwards or downwards to avoid that the suction pressure removes itself too far from the set point.


84/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Input signal

0 5 10 15 Time

%

0 5 10 15 Time

BA

%

Output signalP-part

A: Proportional band=10°CB: Proportional band=5°C

0 5 10 15 Time

CD

Output signalI-part

C: Integral time=30 sec

%

D: Integral time=60 sec


85/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

Reciprocating compressorsReciprocating compressors are capacity regulat-ed in stages by connection/disconnection of cylin-ders, typically in pairs, through solenoid valves controlled by UNISAB II.

How fast the compressor loads/unloads stages is determined by the timers DELAY UP and DELAY DOWN, which will start counting as soon as the value is outside the neutral zone.

The regulator is allowed to have a P Band of 0, which means that the stages are loaded in sec-onds as set.

If the P Band is above 0, the delay times can be prolonged as long as the value is within the P Band.

The P Band is only relevant if the P Band factors DELAY UP and/or DELAY DOWN are set in the picture P BAND FACTOR at a value above 1. See section P BAND FACTOR.

If the value is just outside the neutral zone and the P Band factor DELAY UP is eg 10, counting will be slow: "1 sec." becomes 10 sec.

If the value is just outside the P Band, counting will be speeded up, "1 sec" becomes 1 sec.

%

FE

Output signalD-part

0 5 10 15 Time

E: Differential time=10 sec

F: Differential time=20 sec

%

Output signal

PID-part

0 5 10 15 Time


86/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Table 9A - Settings - Regulating parameters, Reciprocating compressors

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factorysetting

Unit

Suct. pressure Sp 1 - 1 (-90)

+ 9 (+ 24.8)1*

+1(-19.4)

BAR°C/R717

Sp 2 - 1 (-90)

+ 9 (+ 24.8)1*

+1(-19.4)

BAR°C/R717

Nz 0 100 4 °C

Pb 0 100 10 °C

Brine temperature Sp 1 - 60 + 100 20 °C

Sp 2 - 60 + 100 20 °C

Nz 0 100 4 °C

Pb 0 100 5 °C

Disch. side Sp 1 - 1 (-90)

+ 24(+ 58)2*

+ 8 (+ 21.4)

BAR°C/R717

Sp 2 -1 (-90)

+ 24(+ 58)2*

+ 8 (+ 21.4)

BAR°C/R717

Nz 0 100 4 °C

Pb 0 100 10 °C

Hot water Sp 1 - 60 + 100 20 °C

Sp 2 - 60 + 100 20 °C

Nz 0 100 4 °C

Pb 0 100 5 °C

Ext. cool Universal regulator Sp 1 - 999 + 999 0 -

Sp 2 - 999 + 999 0 -

Nz 0 + 999 0 -

Pb 0 + 999 0 -

Ext. heat Universal regulator Sp 1 - 999 + 999 0 -

Sp 2 - 999 + 999 0 -

Nz 0 + 999 0 -

Pb 0 + 999 0 -


87/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

Motor current limiter Sp 1 0 2500 2500 Amp

Sp 2 0 2500 2500 Amp

NOTE: 1* HPO/HPC +25 bar (+60°/R717) 2* HPO/HPC +40 bar (+79.4°/R717)

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factorysetting

Unit


88/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Table 9B - Settings - Regulating parameters, Screw compressors

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory setting Unit

Capacity control Nz 0.0 10.0 0.0 %

Pb 0.1 999.9 200.0 %

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

Min Pulse 1.0 50.0 1.0 sec

Run Time 1.0 999.0 See note 1 sec

Vi slide control, Compressors with automatic Vi regu-lation

Nz 0.0 10.0 4.0 %

Pb 0.1 999.9 200.0 %

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

Min Pulse 1.0 10.0 1.0 sec

Run Time 1.0 999.0 See note 1 sec

Suct. pressure Sp 1 -1(-90)

+9(+24.8)

+1(-19.4)

BAR°C/R717

Sp 2 -1(-90)

+9(+24.8)

+1(-19.4)

BAR°C/R717

Nz 0.0 200.0 0.0 °C/R717

Pb 0.1 999.9 10.0 °C/R717

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 60.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

Brine temperature Sp 1 -60 100 20 °C

Sp 2 -60 100 20 °C

Nz 0.0 100 0 °C

Pb 0.1 999.9 50 °C

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0 sec


89/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

Note 1. Run Time factory settings are as follows:

Discharge Sp 1 -1(90)

+24(+58)

+8(+21.4)

BAR°C/R717

Sp 2 -1(90)

+24(+58)

+8(+21.4)

BAR°C/R717

Nz 0.0 200 0.0 °C/R717

Pb 0.1 999.9 10 °C/R717

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 60.0 sec

T.Diff. 0.0 99.9 0 sec

Hot water Sp 1 -60 100 20 °C

Sp 2 -60 100 20 °C

Nz 0.0 100 0 °C

Pb 0.1 999.9 50 °C

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30.0 sec

T.Diff 0.0 99.9 0.0 sec

Ext. coolUniversalregulator

Sp 1 -999 +999 0

Sp 2 -999 +999 0

Nz 0 999.9 0

Pb 0 999.9 100

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30 sec

T.Diff 0.0 99.9 0 sec

Ext. heatUniversalregulator

Sp 1 -999 +999 0

Sp 2 -999 +999 0

Nz 0 999.9 0

Pb 0 999.9 100

T.Int. 0.5 999.9 30 sec

T.Diff 0.0 99.9 0 sec

Motor current Sp 1 0 2500 2500 Amp

Limiter Sp 2 0 2500 2500 Amp

Regulator type Minimum Maximum Factory setting Unit


90/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Table 9C - Settings - Regulating parameters, SAB 330

Set points on regulatorsAll regulators for capacity regulation (suction pressure, brine temp, etc) can have two 2 set points which are selected by opening/closing a digital input named REGULATOR SET POINT 1 OR 2 (see wiring diagrams).

Note that also the Motor Current Limiter has two set points, which are selected with another digital input named MOTOR CURRENT SET POINT 1 OR 2.

CONTROL ON = SUCTIONThe pressure is measured by the built-in pressure transducer on the compressor suction side.

The regulator is set by selecting SUCTION I SUCT.PRESS I PARAMETERS followed by re-peated pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the picture. Note that the Neutral zone and the

P Band can only be selected when the pressure is shown in °C/R.

CONTROL ON = BRINEThe brine temperature is measured by a Pt 100 sensor on the spot where the temperature is to be regulated. The sensor is not built into the com-pressor.

The regulator is set by selecting BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS followed by repeated pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the picture.

CONTROL ON = DISCHARGE

The pressure is measured by the built-in pressure transducer on the compressor discharge side.

The regulator is set by selecting DISCH. SIDE I DISCH.PRESS I PARAMETERS followed by re-peated pressures on K until reaching the bottom

SAB 330 S SAB 330 L SAB 330 E Others

Cap. Run Time 41 56 74 60

Vi Run Time 19 24 31 60

Regulator type Factory setting SAB 330

Hydraulic Mechanical

Capacity control Nz 0 2

Pb 200 200

T.Int. 30 30

T.Diff. 0 0

Min Pulse 1 2

Run time See note 1 See note 1

Vi slide control, Nz 4 10

Compressors with Pb 200 200

automatic Vi T.Int. 30 30

regulation T.Diff. 0 0

Min Pulse 1 1

Run time See note 1 See note 1


91/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

of the picture. Note that the Neutral zone and the P Band can only be selected when the pressure is shown in °C/R.

CONTROL ON = HOT WATERThe hot water temperature is measured by a Pt 100 sensor connected to the brine temperature in-put (see wiring diagrams). Position the sensor on the spot where the temperature is to be regulated. The sensor is not built into the compressor.

The regulator is set by selecting BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS followed by repeated pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the picture.

Note that the BRINE REGULATOR at this stage functions as a HOT WATER REGULATOR. The difference is that the compressor will load capacity at decreasing temperature.

Universal regulator (Ext. input)Besides the above-mentioned regulators it is also possible to use the universal regulator.

To do so, connect a 4-20 mA sensor (pressure, temperature or other) to the UNISAB II input named POSSIBLE REMOTE COMPRESSOR OPERATION.

When selecting 4-20 mA input in the menu CALI-BRATE, the following picture will appear:

The signal must be scaled to fit the sensor meas-uring range.

Ex.: A temperature sensor of -30°C to +20°C is used.

The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G and the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to -30 and press G .

Move the cursor down to 20 mA, press G and the cursor moves right once more. Change the value to +20 and press G .

Move the cursor down to USED FOR, press G and the cursor moves to the right. Select EXTER-NAL INPUT SIGNAL by means of J or K.

The picture will now look like this:

Each measuring signal can be scaled in accord-ance with the transducer measuring range.

In the menu CONFIG, select in line CONTROL ON one of the following:

Ext. coolIf selecting this function, the compressor will reg-ulate the capacity upwards in case of increasing measuring value.

Ext. heat

If selecting this function, the compressor will reg-ulate the capacity upwards in case of decreasing measuring value.

Now select menu BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PA-RAMETERS. Press to the bottom of the picture with K where the set values of the regulator are positioned. These can be set by pressing G fol-lowed by J or K.

Set point control with current inputThe set points of SUCTION PRESSURE, BRINE TEMPERATURE, DISCH.PRESSURE, HOT WA-TER and CAPACITY can all be changed through a 4-20 mA signal.

4 mA 0

20 mA 0

NOT USED

4 mA -30

20 mA 20

EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL


92/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Connect these to the terminals as shown in the wiring diagrams.

Suction pressureIn the menu CONFIG SUCTION SIDE must be se-lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following picture will appear:

Ex.: The set point is to vary from -50 to -10°C/R corresponding to a change of the current signal from 4 - 20 mA.

The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-ue to -50 with K, then press G again.

Move the cursor to 20 mA, Press G until the cur-sor moves to the left, and change the value -10, press G again.

Move the cursor to third line, press G until the cursor moves to the right, and select SUCT.PRESSURE SETPOINT with J or K. Fin-ish by pressing G .


The set point of the suction pressure regulator is to vary from -50 to -10°C/R corresponding to a change in the current from 4-20 mA.

It is possible to follow the set point value by select-ing SUCTION SIDE I SUCTION PRESSURE I PARAMETERS and press downwards to ACTU-AL SP with K.

Brine temperatureIn the menu CONFIG BRINE must be selected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following picture will appear:

Ex.: The set point is to vary from -10 to +20°C cor-responding to a change of the current signal from 4 - 20 mA.

The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to -10 with K, then press G again.

Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to +20, and press G.

Move the cursor down to CONTROL ON. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, and select BRINE TEMP SET POINT with J or K . Finish by pressing G .


The set point of the brine regulator is now going to change from -10 to +20°C corresponding to a change of the current from 4-20 mA.

It is possible to follow the set point value by select-ing BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K.

Disch. pressure In the menu CONFIG DISCH.SIDE must be se-lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA

4 mA 0

20 mA 0

NOT USED

4 mA -50

20 mA -10

SUCTION PRESS. SETPOINT

4 mA 0

20 mA 0

NOT USED

4 mA -10

20 mA 20

BRINE TEMP. SETPOINT


93/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following picture will appear:

Ex.: The setpoint is to vary from +10 til +35°C/R corresponding to a change of the current signal from 4-20 mA.

The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to +10 with J, then press G again.


Move the cursor down to third line. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, and select DISCH. PRESSURE SET POINT with J or K. Finish by pressing G .


The set point of the discharge pressure regulator is now going to change from +10 to +35°C/R cor-responding to a change of the current from 4-20 mA.

It is possible to follow the set point value by select-ing DISCH.SIDE I DISCH.PRESS I PARAME-TERS and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K .

HotwaterIn the menu CONFIG, HOTWATER must be se-lected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA

INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following picture will appear:

Ex.: The set point is to vary from +30 to +65°C cor-responding to a change in the current signal from 4-20 mA.

The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-ue to +30 with K, then press G again.


Move the cursor down to USED FOR, press G until the cursor moves to the right, and select HOTWATER SET POINT with J eller K. Finish by pressing G.

The picture will now like this:

The setpoint in the hotwater regulator now chang-es from +30 to +65°C, corresponding to a change in the current from 4-20 mA.

It is possible to follow the setpoint value by select-ing BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K .

Capacity controlUNISAB II must be set in REMOTE mode in the picture CONTROL.

In the menu CALIB, select 4-20 mA INPUT I, and the following picture will appear:

4 mA 0

20 mA 0

NOT USED

4 mA 10

20 mA 35

DISCH. PRESS. SETPOINT

4 mA 0

20 mA 0

NOT USED

4 mA +30

20 mA +65

HOT WATER SETPOINT


94/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Ex.: The set point of the capacity slide on a screw compressor is to vary from 0 to 100% correspond-ing to a change in the current signal from 4-20 mA.

The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-ue to 0 (skip this if the value is 0) with J or K, and press G again.

Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, and change the val-ue to 100, and press G.

Move the cursor down to USED FOR. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, and select CA-PACITY SET POINT with J or K. Finish by press-ing G.


The capacity slide will now move from 0% to 100% corresponding to a change in the current from 4 - 20 mA.

In the same way it is possible to control the capac-ity on a reciprocating compressor.

The reciprocating compressor changes one ca-pacity stage up or down depending on whether the signal is above or below the percentage corre-sponding to the capacity stage in question. The timers DELAY UP and DELAY DOWN, which are used during the loading/unloading of capacity stages, are now active when capacity regulation

takes place with an external 4-20 mA signal (ap-plies to version 1.08 and later versions). This means that for an SMC 108 without total unload-ing the following changes apply:

0% ≤ Signal < 25% = 0% capacity,25% ≤ Signal < 50% = 25% capacity,50% ≤ Signal < 75% = 50% capacity,75% ≤ Signal < 100% = 75% capacity,100% ≤ Signal = 100% capacity.

This works as follows:

StartWhen the signal is above 5% (4.8 mA) and AUTO START = YES has been configured, the timer START DELAY will begin to count down (in case of screw compressors).

For reciprocating compressors, the timer START DELAY will start once the signal is above the low-est capacity stage. When the timer START DE-LAY has counted down, the compressor will start and follow the signal up/down. Note, however, that various limiters may reduce the compressor capacity.

StopWhen the signal is below 5% (4.8 mA) and AUTO STOP = YES has been configured, the timer STOP DELAY will stop counting down (in case of screw compressors). For reciprocating compres-sors, the timer STOP DELAY will start once the signal is below the lowest capacity stage. For re-ciprocating compressors with total unloading, the timer STOP DELAY will be activated when the sig-nal is below 0%. When the STOP DELAY timer has finished counting down, the compressor will stop.

In case the current signal drops to -10% (2.4 mA), there will be a change to the chosen form of regu-lation (eg suction pressure regulation, brine regu-lation, etc). If the signal exceeds -10% once more, there will be a change to capacity remote control.

4 mA 0

20 mA 0

NOT USED

4 mA 0

20 mA 100

CAPACITY SETPOINT


95/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

When UNISAB II is configured to "capacity set point", the starting number is changed to 0. The "old" starting number is stored and reinserted in case UNISAB II is configured differently from "ca-pacity set point".

Climatic ControlThis function can be used for both reciprocating and screw compressors without automatic Vi reg-

ulation. The function is included in the menu CON-FIG and is further described in section Configura-tion.

The set point of the inlet temperature on the water side of plants that are regulated on brine temper-ature or hot water temperature can be dislocated by the outside temperature. This requires a 4 - 20 mA temperature transducer, which is connected to the current inlet in UNISAB II as shown in the wiring diagrams positioned at the end of this man-ual.

Use a standard temperature transducer with a suitabe temperature range, eg -30 - +25°C as shown in Fig. 5.2. Note that the points of disconti-nuity in the diagram will be determined by the transducer measuring range as seen in the follow-ing examples 1 and 2.

Fig. 5.2

No further compensation will be made once the outside temperature is above the top point of dis-

continuity and below the bottom point of disconti-nuity.

The factor by which the outside temperature will influence the inlet temperature positively or nega-tively must be set in the BRINE, HOTWATER or UNIVERSAL regulator. In the picture CONFIG, select CONTROL ON = BRINE or HOTWATER, or (UNIVERSAL regulator) EXT.COL/EXT. HEAT as well as CLIMA CONTROL = YES in the menu CONFIG.

Example 1:

On a water cooling unit, the inlet temperature is to be corrected by the outside temperature.

1) If the outside temperature is +30 °C or more, the inlet temperature should be +4°C.

2) If the outside temperature is+0°C or less, the inlet temperature should be +12°C.

In the menu CONFIG, set CONTROL ON on BRINE and CLIMA CONTROL on YES. Select an outside sensor with a range of 0 - +30 °C.

Fig. 5.3

5

5

Sp 1 (+65 °C)

Sp 2(+25 °C)

4 mA(30 °C)

20 mA(+25 °C)

T out

T inlet

40302010-10

4

2

6

10

12

8

14

T inlet

Sp 1

Sp 2

T out


96/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

In the drawing the settings are SP1 = 12°C at To = 0°C and SP2 = 4°C at To = 30°C.Note that SP1 belongs to the lowest and SP2 to highest outside temperature.

The straight line in Fig. 5.3 shows how the inlet temperature is going to vary under the influence of the outside temperature.

Select the menu BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PA-RAMETERS and go down to SET POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 with K.

Give SET POINT 1 the value SP1 = 12°C from Fig. 5.3 by pressing G.

Give SET POINT 2 the value SP2 = 4°C from Fig. 5.3 by pressing G.

At the same time set NEUTRAL ZONE = 3°C and PROP.BAND = 5°C as starting points.

The system is now adjusted to the desired func-tion.


The ACTUAL SP shows the value according to which the inlet temperature is regulated at that particular moment. If the outside temperature is 30°C, this value must be 4°C.

If the outside temperature is 0°C, the value must be 12°C.

The outside temperature can be seen in % of the measuring range in the picture MOTOR:

Example 2:

On a heat pump unit the inlet temperature is to be corrected by the outside temperature.

1) If the outside temperature is +30°C, the inlet temperature must be +40 °C.

2) If the outside temperature is-10°C, the inlet temperature must be +65 °C.

In the menu CONFIG, adjust CONTROL ON to HOTWATER and CLIMA CONTROL to YES.

Select an outside sensor in the range -10 - +30 °C.

Fig. 5.4

In the drawing the settings are SP1 = 65°C at To = -10°C and SP2 = 40°C at To = 30°C.Note that SP1 belongs to the lowest and SP2 to the highest outside temperature.

The straight line indicates how the inlet tempera-ture is going to vary under the influence of the out-side temperature.

Select menu BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAM-ETERS and go down to SET POINT 1 and SET POINT 2.

Give SET POINT 1 the value SP1 = 65°C from the figure by pressing G.

Give SET POINT 2 the value SP2 = 40°C from the figure by pressing G.

SET POINT 1 12 °C

SET POINT 2 0 °C

NEUTRAL ZONE 3 °C

PROP. BAND 5 °C

MOTOR CURR XXX A

EXT. INPUT XX

OUTSIDE TEMP. XX %

-20 10-10 20 30 40

20

30

40

50

60

70

10

80

outT

SP2

SP1

InletT


97/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

At the same time set NEUTRAL ZONE = 3°C and PROP.BAND = 5°C as starting points.

The system is now adjusted to the desired func-tion.

The ACTUAL SP shows the value according to which the inlet temperature is regulated at that particular moment. If the outside temperature is 30°C, this value must be 40°C.

If the outside temperature is -10°C, the value must be 65°C.

The outside temperature can be seen in % of the measuring range in the picture CAPACITY:

Examples 1) and 2) precondition that the flow temperature is measured with the normal Pt 100 input, but if a temperature transducer of 4-20 mA is installed in a common reservoir, the outdoor compensation will also be able to work here.

See section Universal regulator in which the pro-cedure will be exactly the same as described in above examples as this regulator can also be used for both COOLING and HEATING functions.

In both examples the inlet temperature will rise at falling outside temperatures.

If the opposite effect is required, ie rising inlet tem-perature at rising outside temperature, SP1 and SP2 must be switched.

Adjusting slide speed (screw compressors with hydraulic slides)

Capacity slideThe capacity slide is moved by adding or remov-ing oil from the slide piston cylinder. The move-ment is controlled by UNISAB II, which activates the solenoid valves in the oil lines, thus moving the slide in the desired direction. If this movement takes place too fast, the system will become very unstable and give rise to unnecessary wear and tear of the slide.

To prevent the above, adjustable throttle valves have been built into the oil lines and by changing the opening degree of the throttle valves, the slide movement can be adjusted to a suitable speed.

The slide speed is checked with the compressor in MANUAL mode, at normal oil temperature and by activating E F used for capacity regulation.

With the slide in minimum position (< 5%) and with a constant pressure on E (capacity up), it takes about 60 sec for the slide to move to 100%, and with a constant pressure on F (capacity down) approx 60 sec to move down to 0%.

Is this not the case, adjust the throttle valves.

Volume ratio slideThe volume ratio slide is moved by adding or re-moving oil for the slide piston cylinder. The move-ment is controlled by UNISAB II, which activates the solenoid valves in the oil lines, thus moving the slide in the desired direction. If this movement takes place too fast, the system will become very unstable and give rise to unnecessary wear and tear of the slide.

To prevent the above, adjustable throttle valves have been built into the oil lines and by changing the opening degree of the throttle valves, the slide movement can be adjusted to a suitable speed.

SET POINT 1 65 °C

SET POINT 2 40 °C

NEUTRAL ZONE 3 °C

PROP. BAND 5 °C

MOTOR CURR XXX A

EXT. INPUT XX

CLIMA COMP. XX %


98/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

The speed is checked with the compressor in MANUAL mode and at a normal oil temperature.

Bring the capacity slide to 20-30% position.

Select picture CAPACITY I VI POSITION I SET POINT 1.

and change the value to -10% by pressing G and K. This will make the slide move to minimum po-sition.

Return to VI POSITION to check the slide move-ment.

When the slide has reached minimum, change SET POINT 1 to 110%. The slide will now move to maximum position. Check the speed of the move-ment from 0% to 100% in the picture with VI PO-SITION.

The movement from 0% to 100% must be adjust-ed on the throttle valves to last approx 120 sec. This also applies to the movement from 100% to 0%.

Use SET POINT 1 with either - 10% or 110% to move the slide back and forth until the speed is correct.

Variable Zero position

In generalThe flow of screw compressors at low slide posi-tions seen in relation to the fully loaded "flow", is strongly dependent on the operating conditions. Thus, it has turned out to be expedient to enter a "floating zero point", which ensures that the com-pressor operates with a correct slide position.

The program in UNISAB II ensures that the SAB 202 compressor always adapts to the variable op-erating conditions.

Based on discharge pressure, suction pressure, compressor type and capacity, UNISAB II calcu-lates a "zero point" below which the compressor capacity slide is not permittted to drop while the compressor is operating.

When the compressor starts, the new "zero point" will be calculated, and the capacity slide moves as quickly as possible from a physical zero point (me-chanical impact) to the calculated zero. As long as the slide position is below the calculated zero point, the capacity is shown as a negative value in the display.

In case the calculated zero point cannot be set within a certain time limit, which is dependent on the calculated movement, an alarm will be issued.

When the compressor stops, the slide will drop to the calculated zero point. The motor will stop, and hereafter the slide will be pushed down to the physical zero position by the built-in spring.

Once the differential pressure across the com-pressor has been equalized (Π=1), the calculated zero point and the physical zero position will be the same.

If the pressure conditions are changed during op-eration so that the calculated "zero point" of the slide is moved (whereby the corrected capacity is changed), the capacity may be a negative value for a certain period.

For all other screw compressor types than SAB 202 a "zero point" can be set manually, if required. This manually set zero point has the same func-tion as described above in the sections for com-pressor start and stop.

Corrected capacityUNISAB II will automatically correct the capacity reading in relation to both the new calculated zero point and to the Vi slide position when automatic

Vi regulation is included.

SETPOINT 1 0.0%


99/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

With manual Vi regulation the capacity reading is

automatically corrected in relation to the new cal-culated zero point.

Remember that whenever the Vi slide is moved

manually, the position transmitter of the capacity slide must be recalibrated at 100%.

The corrected capacity is calculated according to the following principle:

Fig. 5.5

The capacity slide signal from the position trans-mitter is scaled in such a way that 0% is read when the slide position corresponds to the calcu-lated/set zero point, and 100% is read when the capacity slide meets the Vi slide, regardless of

whether the setting is carried out automatically or manually.

Automatic setting of new zero point (SAB 202)The zero point for the various types of SAB 202 is calculated according to a programmed algorithm.

The current calculated value of the zero point is displayed in picture:

SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I ZERO CAPACITY POS.

With manual Vi regulation the zero point is correct-

ed and set automatically, corresponding to an op-timum setting of the Vi slide. Consequently, it is of

great importance that the setting of the Vi slide is correct.

Manual setting of new zero point (all types of screw compressors)For all screw compressor types without automat-ic zero point setting, it is possible to set a "zero point" manually, below which the compressor ca-pacity slide is not allowed to drop while the com-pressor is operating.

For SAB 202S and SAB 202L, which have auto-matic settings of the zero point, manual setting is usually not allowed.

The manual setting of the zero point is carried out in the picture SETUP I CONFIG. in the configu-ration point:

MANUAL ZERO 0.0%

The setting ranges between 0-40% of max capac-ity slide travel (at Vi ratio = 2).

With manual Vi regulation the zero point is cor-

rected automatically by a factor that depends on an optimum (calculated) setting of the Vi-slide.

Consequently, it is very important that the set-ting of the Vi slide is correct.

0%

1.5 12 25 4.5 3 2

100%

0% 100%

0% 0%100%

Volume cond.:

Zero% pos.

“Zero slide” “Vi slide”

Cap. slideMeasured slide pos.

Corrected capacityPressure cond.


100/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

The setting will be stored when the compressor stops and/or UNISAB II is switched off.

Built-in spacer block If the compressor has a built-in spacer block and Vi regulation is automatic, the MECHANICAL

ZERO must be set on YES. Thus, the travel of the capacity slide will be reduced by the % value [0-40%] which is entered in MANUAL ZERO so that the corrected capacity may be calculated and shown correctly.

The value [0-40%] that must be entered in MAN-UAL ZERO must have the following size:

Fig. 5.6

Setting of MECHANICAL ZERO is carried out in the picture SETUP I CONFIG. in the configura-tion point:

MECHANICAL ZERO [NO/YES]MANUAL ZERO 0.0%

The position transmitter is calibrated with the spacer block mounted and the Vi-slide in minimum

(0%).

The alarm In case the slide cannot reach the position corre-sponding to a calculated or set zero point (ie a positive read capacity) before the expiry of the timer Tcap.neg., the compressor will be stopped with

the following alarm:

CAPACITY ERROR

Each second the timer Tcap.neg. is counting down by

a factor somewhere between 1 and 180 depend-ing upon the read negative capacity. Each time the slide moves above 0% read capacity, the timer

will be stopped. The timer is reset (set to the reset value) and is restarted once the slide moves be-low -2% capacity.

The timer is set in the picture SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER RESET in the timer

CAP.NEG.

The reset value can be set in the interval of 60-20000. The factory value is 10000.

It is very important that the timer has been set cor-rectly. Too low a value will result in the alarm Ca-pacity error. Too high a value will make the com-pressor run for too long a period with a negative capacity.

ConfigurationTo obtain a correct calculation of the zero point, it is important that the compressor type and swept volume have been entered correctly.

The swept volume of the compressor is deter-mined on the basis of:

Compressor typeRPM (50/60 Hz)Male/female rotor

In case of SAB 202, UNISAB II will automatically enter a swept volume value corresponding to the S type with Male rotor and a 2-pole 50 Hz motor, ie 1229 m3/h. The correct swept volume must be based on the number of revolutions of the com-pressor, ie 50/60 Hz supply, and on whether the compressor has male or female rotor drive:

SAB 202 SM/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1229 m3/hSAB 202 SM/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 1475 m3/hSAB 202 SF/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1843 m3/hSAB 202 SF/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 2212 m3/hSAB 202 LM/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1590 m3/hSAB 202 LM/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 1908 m3/hSAB 202 LF/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 2385 m3/hSAB 202 LF/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 2862 m3/h

100%manual zero =length of spacer block

length of total capacity travel


101/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

The nominal swept volume at 50 Hz can be read on the compressor name plate.

As mentioned earlier, two new configuration points have been introduced in the picture SETUP I CONFIG.:

MECHANICAL ZERO NO [/YES]MANUAL ZERO 0.0%

Only if the compressor has a built-in spacer block as well as automatic Vi regulation, the MECAN-

ICAL ZERO must be set on YES. In all other cas-es MECHANICAL ZERO is set on NO. See sec-tion Built-in Spacer Block.

Manual setting of the zero point is carried out by entering a zero point between 0-40% of max ca-pacity slide travel in MANUAL ZERO 0.0%

See section Manual setting of new zero point.

Zero pos. pictureReading of the current calculated zero point value as well as any manual set zero point value takes place in the diagnosis picture:

SET UP I DIAGNOSIS I ZERO CAPACITY POS.

Electrical slide control

(Screw compressors SAB 250 and SAB 330)

These screw compressors are fitted with a capac-ity slide (master slide) driven by an AC motor through magnetic transmission, gearbox and spindle, as well as a hydraulical Vi slide (baby

slide) which is controlled by a solenoid valve. The digital output for the valve is always controlled au-tomatically by UNISAB II. Only the capacity slide is fitted with a position transmitter.

Note that the minimum pulse when moving the ca-pacity slide is 1 second. For a SAB 330L this cor-responds to a minimum capacity position change of 1.8%. It is very useful to have this in mind when adjusting the PID regulators. Further, there is a pause of at least 1 second when changing the ro-tation direction of the motor.

Part load and full loadAs regards capacity control and Vi adjustment, there are two operating modes: Part load and full load.

At full load, the capacity is by definition 100%. By activating the solenoid valve, the Vi slide is forced

in mesh with the capacity slide. The Vi is then ad-

justed by changing the capacity slide position, which consequently moves the Vi slide. Note that

in the survey pictures, full load is indicated in the

fourth line by a solenoid valve symbol:

At part load, the Vi slide is reset to minimum po-

sition by deactivating the solenoid valve. The ca-pacity slide is moved according to the capacity re-quirement.

UNISAB II changes from part load to full load mode when the capacity exceeds the selected limit, VI MODE included in the picture SETUP I

(current reading 0-40%)(manual adjustment 0-40%)(current slide position corresponds to 4-20 mA(corrected capacity - as read)

CALCULATED ZERO MANUAL ZERO CAP. POSITION CAPACITY

22.0%0.0%

66.5%100.0%


102/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

CONFIG I COMPRESSOR. The default limit is VI MODE = 97%, but it can be adjusted in the range 70 to 97%.

UNISAB II returns to part load when the capacity requirement decreases.

The changes described are performed automati-cally in any of the modes MANUAL, AUTO and REMOTE.

Calculated Vi position

When changing to or running in full load mode, UNISAB II determines an optimal calculated Vi

position xVi [%] according to suction pressure/dis-

charge pressure ratio, compressor type, refriger-ant and whether there is an economizer. Further-more, the corresponding capacity slide position is calculated:

xcap [%] xVi =100 [%] -xVi [%] *

(Vi-slide [mm] /Cap-slide [mm])

While in full load mode, the xcap[%] xVi is the set

point of the capacity slide position regulator.

Change to full loadWhen changing from part load to full load, UNISAB II will run through the following steps:

1. Move capacity slide if necessary (see be-low).

2. Activate solenoid valve of Vi slide to force Vi

slide into mesh with capacity slide.

3. Move capacity slide (and thus Vi slide) to op-

timal position xcap [%] xVi.

As regards point 1, UNISAB II compares the above defined xcap [%] xVi with the actual capacity

slide position. If the actual position is much higher than xcap [%] xVi , the result would be an undesirable

power consumption if the Vi slide valve is activat-

ed immediately. Therefore, the capacity slide is

moved as quickly as possible down into the area where UNISAB II calculates that the power con-sumption will be reasonable. After this, UNISAB II will move on to points 2 and 3.

Change to part loadWhen changing from full load to part load, UNISAB II will run through the following steps:

1. If necessary, move capacity slide (and thus Vi slide) as close as possible to the limit VI

MODE to avoid undesirable capacity jumps. However, stop movement if/when reaching the limit for reasonable power consumption.

2. Deactivate solenoid valve of Vi slide to re-

lease Vi slide and move it to minimum posi-

tion.

3. If still necessary, move capacity slide to the limit VI MODE.

4. Change to normal capacity control.

Position indicationsIn the picture MOTOR, CAPACITY and VI POSI-TION are indicated.

At full load, CAPACITY indication will show 100%, while VI POSITION is calculated from the actual capacity slide position.

At part load, CAPACITY indication will show the actual capacity slide position, while VI POSITION is 0%.

Slide brake controlThe slide brake is released for a short time -BRAKE DLY - before the slide motor is activated. The brake is also released for the period of time BRAKE DLY after deactivating the slide motor. Brake DLY can be selected in the range 0 to 0.5 seconds in the picture DIAGNOSES I MISC. FUNCTIONS.


103/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_430

_en.

fm

Capacity alarmIf the slide does not move as expected, a capacity alarm will be issued. This means that each time the slide moves at least 0.5% in the chosen direc-tion, a CAPACITY timer is reset to 100 seconds. If

a move is expected, the timer will count down. If the timer reaches 0, the alarm will be issued. The timer can be inspected in the picture DIAG-NOSES I MISC. FUNCTIONS.


104/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

6. Limiting functions

105/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_431

_en.

fm

6. Limiting functionsUNISAB II includes a number of limiting functions (in the following called limiters).

The purpose of a limiter is to prevent shutdowns by limiting or even changing the compressor ca-pacity when the measured value exceeds the se-lected limits. In most cases, "changing the capac-ity" means decreasing it. However, this is not the case with all limiters.

In general, a limiter can be watching, passive or active. While all limiters are watching, the com-pressor start/stop and the capacity regulation will work normally.

While a limiter is passive or active, the compres-sor cannot be started. If the compressor is in op-eration, the capacity regulation will be partly disa-bled. Further, if a limiter is active, the capacity will be changed actively.

All relevant limiters are permanently in operation. If necessary, they will intervene in any of the oper-ating modes MANUAL, AUTO and REMOTE.

In case the compressor is in MANUAL mode and a limiter is active, the capacity slide will automat-ically be returned to its original value as soon as the limiter is watching.

When a limiter is passive or active, the red lamp will flash slowly, and the warning relay will be ac-tivated. Further, the display will show whether the limiter is passive or active.

There is a standard limiter for each of the follow-ing:

• Low suction pressure

• High discharge pressure

• High motor current

• Low brine temperature

• High water temperature

• High differential pressurePdiff =Pdisch - Psuct (HPO and

HPC reciprocating compressors)

Furthermore, the following special limiters exist:

• High suction pressure

• Suction ramp

• High discharge temperature

Standard limitersThe standard limiting function is based on the user selected high/low alarm limit, high/low warning limit and the limiting zone Lz. In the special case of the high motor current limiter, the value of Lz is 2% for screw compressors and 5% for reciprocat-ing compressors. In all other cases, Lz is calculat-ed as half the difference between the alarm limit and the warning limit.

Fig. 6.1illustrates how a standard limiter works with the high discharge pressure limiter as exam-ple.


106/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 6.1

In the example, the alarm (= shutdown) limit for high discharge pressure has been set for 16 bar, while the warning limit is 14 bar. As indicated, the size of the limiting zone (Lz) is then (16 -14) / 2 = 1 bar. The limit of the limiting zone is thus warning limit - Lz = 14 -1 = 13 bar.

As shown in Fig. 6.1, most reciprocating compres-sor limiters differ from the corresponding limiters for screw compressor in the way that when the measured value is within the limiting zone, the sta-tus of the limiter will depend on whether the limiter has been watching or active. If the limiter has been watching, it will remain watching in the limit-ing zone. If the limiter has been active, it will be-come passive for as long as it is in the limiting zone.

Motor current limiterEven the high motor current limiter is special for reciprocating compressors. When one stage is disengaged due to the limiter, the resulting motor current drop will be measured. It is assumed that if the stage is re-engaged, the motor current will increase by the size of the drop. To avoid disen-gaging and re-engaging in turn, the limiter will en-sure that the stage will not be re-engaged until the resulting current will be below 95% of the limit for the limiter zone.

Note that the warning limit for motor current is SET POINT 1 selected in the picture MOTOR I

MOTOR POWER. If SETPOINT 1 = 1000 kW, the limit for the limiting zone will be 1000 - 2% = 980 kW for screw compressors, and 1000 - 5% = 950 kW for reciprocating compressors.

Limiter is watching. Normal control, capacity can increase or decrease. If compressor is not in operation, it can be started.

Limiter changes from watching to passive.

Limiter is passive. Capacity cannot be increased. Capacity is not reduced by Limiter, but possibly by egulator. If compressor is not running, it cannot be started.

Limiter becomes active. Capacity is reduced at once, and timer begins to count.

Limiter is active. At each timeout, capacity is reduced and timer restarted, until compressor stops at low capacity. If compres-sor is not running, it cannot be started.

Limiter changes from active to passive.

Limiter changes from passive to watching.

Compressor is stopped (shutdown) immediately.

SCREW COMPRESSORS (ALL LIMITERS) andRECIPR. COMPRESSORS (MOTOR CURRENT LIMITER)

RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS (ALL LIMITERS EXCEPT MOTOR CURRENT LIMITER)

ALARM

WARNING Limiting zone

Time Time

1

23

45

78

6


107/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_431

_en.

fm

High difference pressure limiterNote in particular that this limiter only applies to HPO and HPC compressors and that it has a fixed warning limit of 25.2 bar and a fixed alarm limit of 26 bar. The limiter is released at 25 bar and it is passive between 25-25.2 bar.

Special limiters

High suction pressure limitation

It is possible to have a high suction pressure lim-iting function. The effect of this high suction pres-sure limiting function is that the compressor ca-pacity is limited to an adjustable max value when-ever the suction pressure is above the suction pressure warning limit.

Max capacity at "high suction pressure limitation" is set in picture: SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAP. LIMIT as: LIMIT HIGH xxx.x%. High limit can be set between 0% and 100% where a setting of 100% disables the function.

In the WARNING picture the text "SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM" will appear.

Suction rampWith the timer SUCTION RAMP it is possible to in-dicate the speed at which the compressor is al-lowed to lower its suction pressure 1°C. The func-tion, which is used for as long as the compressor is working down towards its normal operating point, is a combination of low suction pressure lim-iting function and a ramp function.

If the suction pressure ramp limiting function pre-vents the compressor from increasing its capacity above 5%, the timer STOP DELAY will not be ac-tivated and the compressor will continue operat-ing.

The suction pressure limitation without the ramp function can stop the compressor if capacity comes below 5% for a longer period.

High discharge pipe temperature (one-stage re-ciprocating compressors)

From version 1.10 and onwards a capacity limiting function has been entered for all one-stage recip-rocating compressors using refrigerant R717. This function is activated at certain operating con-ditions, especially at excessive differential pres-sure, corresponding to the operating diagram zone 2 (zone 4, however, for CMO, SMC 100 S/L and SMC 180).

At such operating conditions compressors of the CMO/HPO and SMC/HPC type must as minimum load 50% of their capacity when starting up and during operation.

At present the limit curve (which is a straight line) is fixed on the basis of a max permissible dis-charge pipe/oil temperature(T2max) of 150°C as

well as suction superheating of 10°C.

Whenever the limiting function is active, the fol-lowing will occur at start-up:

– Capacity stages corresponding to a min-imum of 50% will be loaded.

When the limiting function is active during opera-tion, with 50% capacity or more, the following will occur:

– It is impossible, both in MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE, to unload capacity stages so that the capacity drops below 50%, ie 50/66% are the lowest capacity stages - also when "total unloading" has been se-lected.

– In AUTO and REMOTE the timer STOP DELAY will be started at 50/66% if the regulator sends out a down regulating signal. If one of the limiting functions is to unload capacity, the timer DELAY DOWN will be started at 50/66%.


108/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

If the compressor is operating at a capacity below 50% when the limiting function is active, the limit-ing function will not actively begin to load stages. However, the following will take place:

– In MANUAL the compressor will be stopped on the "total unloading timer" provided that the capacity stays below 50% for more than approx 4 mins.

– In AUTO and REMOTE the compressor will be stopped on the "total unloading timer" provided the regulator is neutral and capacity remains below 50% for more than approx 4 mins.

– If the regulator sends out a regulating down signal, the timer STOP DELAY will be started.

– If one of the other limiting functions is to unload capacity, the timer DELAY DOWN will stop at 50/66%.

– If the regulator sends out a regulating up signal and the compressor is loading stages so that capacity rises to 50% or more, the situation will be the same as the one described in the previous sec-tion.

In the WARNING picture the text LIMITING DIS-CHARGE TEMP. will appear if the compressor is to be stopped on the "total unloading timer" due to insufficient capacity or if the limiting function pre-vents the capacity from being reduced in MANU-AL, AUTO or REMOTE.

The limit curve (limiting zones 2/4) corresponds as standard to suction superheating of 10°C (factory value).

Since the limit curve is directly dependent on the suction superheating of the plant, the actual su-perheating of the plant must be entered as set point 2 in picture: SUCTION SIDE I SUCTION SUPERHEAT. I SETPOINT 2 if it differs from the above factory value.

Adjusting range: -10 - +30°C

By adjusting SET POINT 2 parameter for suction superheating upwards or downwards, the limit curve will be dislocated accordingly.

If SET POINT 2 is set for -10°C, the limit curve will be dislocated so much upward - 20°C compared to normal - that the limiting fuction will be discon-nected.


109/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_431

_en.

fm

Display indicationsThe following tables show the texts appearing in the display in connection with the various limiters.

Screw compressors Overview picture indication

LimiterCompressor

stoppedCompressor

runningWARNING picture,Passive indication

WARNING picture,Active indication

Standard Limiters:

Low suction pressure READY SUCTION LIM. LIMITING SUCT. PRESS SUCT. PRESS LOW LIM

High discharge pressure READY DISCHARGE LIM. LIMITING DISCH. PRESS DISCH. PRES HIGH LIM

High motor current Irrelevant RUNN. OVERLOAD None None

Low brine temperature READY SUCTION LIM. LIMITING BRINE TEMP and LIMITING SUCT. PRESS

BRINE TEMP LOW LIM andLIMITING BRINE TEMP

High water temperature READY DISCHARGE LIM. LIMITING HOT WATER andLIMITING DISCH. PRESS

BRINE TEMP HIGH LIM andLIMITING HOT WATER

High differential pressure Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant

Special Limiters:

High suction pressure READY SUCTION LIM. 1) None2) 3) SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM3)

Suction ramp Irrelevant SUCTION LIM. LIMITING SUCT. PRESS Irrelevant

High discharge temp. Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant Irrelevant

Recipr. compressor Overview picturei ndication

LimiterCompressor stopped or running WARNING picture,

Passive indicationWARNING picture,

Active indication

Standard Limiters:

Low suction pressure SUCTION LIM. None SUCT. PRESS LOW LIM

High discharge pressure DISCHARGE LIM. None DISCH. PRES HIGH LIM

High motor current RUNN. OVERLOAD None None

Low brine temperature SUCTION LIM.

LIMITING BRINE TEMP BRINE TEMP LOW LIM andLIMITING BRINE TEMP

High water temperature DISCHARGE LIM.

LIMITING HOT WATER BRINE TEMP HIGH LIM andLIMITING HOT WATER

High differential pressure DISCHARGE LIM. None HIGH DIFFERENTIAL PRES-SURE

Special Limiters:

High suction pressure SUCTION LIM. 1) None2) 3) SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM3)

Suction ramp SUCTION LIM. None None

High discharge temperature None None LIMITING DISCH. TEMP


110/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Notes:

1. Only shown while capacity is limited.

2. If limiter is active (at suction pressure > warning limit), it will remain active until the

pressure comes below the warning limit less 2°C/R.

3. Limiter is not active or passive like standard limiters. It actively limits capacity so that it is less than or equal to the selected LIMIT HIGH.

7. Compressor control and surveillance

111/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_432

_en.

fm

7. Compressor control and surveillanceThe various types of reciprocating and screw compressors start in differents ways. Some types have prelubrication whereas others start directly. Under all circumstances certain alarms are sup-pressed at this stage as described in sections Alarms and warnings and Timers.

SAB 202, SAB 163H/128H MK3 with oil pump & VMY Mk3 with full flow pumpThe pump is used for prelubrication and for main-taining of a minimum oil pressure level during op-eration. The pump is started and stopped in ac-cordance with the compressor differential pres-sure during operation.

The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 appear.

SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump is to start, and SET POINT 2 is the pressure at which the pump is to stop. Consequently, adjust SET POINT 1 to the lowest pressure level.

Normal setting for SAB 202:

SET POINT 1 = 2.5 BarSET POINT 2 = 4 Bar

Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G until the cursor moves to the right in the picture. With K and J set the value. When the value has been set, press G once more.

In the same way adjust SET POINT 2.

If the compressor differential pressure (discharge pressure - suction pressure) is below SET POINT 1 during operation, the pump will start immediate-ly.

When the compressor differential pressure has been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 sec, the pump will stop.

Starting sequenceWhen the compressor has received starting per-mission, the oil full flow pump will start. Make sure that the capacity slide is in minimum position. On SAB 202 this is generally always the case as the slide is pushed down by a spring.

The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication system, and when the oil flow switch is activated, the prelubrication period will start.

When the time has expired the compressor is started and the pump will now run for min 60 sec. The pump will stop when the differential pressure is above SET POINT 2 as described above.

Alarm surveillance

During start the following alarms are delayed:

SAB 128HR and 163HR with oil pumpThe compressors SAB 128 and SAB 163 HR are frequency regulated screw compressors, ie the capacity slide is fixed in maximum position and cannot be moved.

The electric oil pump is used for prelubrication and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure during operation.

The pump is started and stopped in accordance with the compressor differential pressure during operation.

The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.

Low oil pressature 45 sec

High filter diff. pressure 300 sec

Low superheat 300 sec

High superheat 300 sec

Low/high oil temperature 300 sec


112/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Normal setting for SAB 128/163 HR:

SET POINT 1 = 2.5 BarSET POINT 2 =4.0 Bar

Set points are adjusted as described in the previ-ous section.

Starting sequenceOnce the compressor has received permission to start, the oil pump will start and oil will be pumped into the compressor lubrication system.

The oil flow switch must be activated within 600 seconds to avoid disconnection.

When the oil flow switch is activated, the solenoid valve (capacity slide down) will be open for 15 seconds and the electric fan will start. The fre-quency converter will receive a signal to start.

The speed is increased to 1000 rpm in 10 sec-onds.

The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec-onds and stop if the differential pressure is higher than SET POINT 2 as described above.

Alarm surveillanceDuring start the following alarms are delayed:

See also section Timers.

SAB 283, SAB 330 and SAB 355 with oil pumpThe pump is used for prelubrication and for main-taining a minimum oil pressure level during oper-ation. The pump is started and stopped in accord-

ance with the compressor differential pressure during operation.


SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump is to start, and SET POINT 2 is the pressure at which the pump is to stop. Consequently, adjust SET POINT 1 to the lowest pressure level.

Normal setting for SAB 250/330:

SET POINT 1 = 2.5 BarSET POINT 2 = 4.0 Bar

Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G until the cursor moves to the right of the picture. With K and J set the value. When the value has been set, press G once more.

In the same way adjust SET POINT 2.


When the compressor differential pressure has been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 sec, the pump will stop.

Starting sequence

When SAB 250/330 compressor stops, UNISAB II will attempt to move the capacity slide below 5% capacity. If this does not succeed, a CAPACITY ERROR alarm will be issued and the compressor will not start.

When the compressor has recieved starting per-mission, the oil full flow pump will start.

The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication system, and when the oil flow switch is activated, the prelubrication period will start.

When the time has expired, the compressor will start and the pump will now run for min 60 sec.

Low oil pressure 45 sec






113/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_432

_en.

fm

The pump will stop when the differential pressure is above SET POINT 2 as described above.


The delayed alarms are described in section Tim-ers.

SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump

Starting sequenceWhen the compressor has received starting per-mission, it must be checked if the capacity slide is in minimum position. Before starting the compres-sor, the oil level switch in the oil separator must be activated.

Start the compressor.

After a delay of 60 seconds from compressor start, no signal from the level switch for more than 10 seconds will result in disconnection.

Alarm surveillance


See also section Timers

GSV/RWF with oil pumpThe pump is used for prelubrication and for main-taining a minimum oil pressure level during oper-ation. The pump is started and stopped in accord-ance with the compressor differential pressure during operation.


SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump is to start whereas SET POINT 2 is the pressure at which the pump is to stop. Consequently, set SET POINT 1 for the lowest pressure level.

Normal setting for GSV/RWF: SET POINT 1 = 2.5 bar. SET POINT 2 = 4.0 bar.

Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G until the cursor has moved to the right side of the picture. Set the value by means of K and J . When the value has been set, press G once more.

SET POINT 2 is set in the same way.


When the compressor differential pressure has been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 seconds, the pump will stop.

Starting sequenceWhen the compressor has received starting per-mission, check whether the capacity slide is still in minimum position. In case of compressor stop, make sure that the capacity slide and the volume slide (if fitted with automatic Vi) are in minimum

position.












114/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Before start-up the oil level switch in the oil sepa-rator must be active. If this is not the case, an alarm for oil system error will be issued.

No signal from the oil level switch will result in dis-connection after a delay of 60 seconds from com-pressor start or during operation.

If the oil level switch is active, the prelubrication period will begin and the oil will be pumped into the compressor lubrication system. When the time period has expired, the compressor will start and the pump will run for min 60 seconds. The pump will stop if the differential pressure is higher than SET POINT 1.


The delayed alarms are described in section Tim-ers.

SV 24/26 with oil pumpThe compressors SV 24 and SV 26 are small slide regulated screw compressors.

The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication and maintenance of a minimum oil pressure dur-ing operation.



Normal setting for SV24/26:



Starting sequenceOnce the compressor has received starting per-mission, check that the capacity slide is in mini-mum position. The oil pump is started and oil will now be pumped into the compressor lubrication system. To avoid disconnection, the oil flow switch must be activated within 45 seconds.

When the oil flow switch is activated, the compres-sor will start.


Alarm surveillance


FV 24/26 with oil pumpThe compressors FV 24 and FV 26 are small fre-quency regulated screw compressors, ie the mounted slide is only used during start and stop.

The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure during operation.













115/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_432

_en.

fm


Normal setting for FV 24/26:



Starting sequenceOnce the compressor has received permission to start, the oil pump will start and oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication system.


When the oil flow switch is activated, the solenoid valve (capacity slide down) will be open for 15 seconds and the electrical fan will start. The fre-quency converter will then receive a signal to start.


The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 sec-onds and will stop if the differential pressure is higher than SET POINT 2 as described above.


See also section Timers

FV 19 with oil pumpThe compressor FV 19 is a small frequency regu-lated screw compressor without the stage regulat-ed capacity control as featured in the SV 19.

The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure during operation.



Normal setting for FV 19:


Set points are adjusted as described in the previ-ous chapter.

Starting sequence

Once the compressor has received starting per-mission, the oil pump will start and oil will be pumped into the compressor lubrication system.


When the oil flow switch is activated, an oil by-pass solenoid valve for unloading will open for 15 seconds and the electrical fan will start.

Starting signal is transmitted to the frequency con-verter.









116/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03



VMY Mk 3without full flow pumpOnce the compressor has received starting per-mission, the oil pump will start. Check that the ca-pacity slide is in minimum position.

The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication system. As soon as the oil flow switch has been activated, the prelubrication period will start.

When the time period has expired, the compres-sor will start and the pump will run for 60 sec.

Alarm surveillance



VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pumpOnce the compressor has received starting per-mission, the pump will start. Make sure that the capacity slide is in minimum position.

The compressor will start working.

The pump will run for 60 sec and stop.

Alarm surveillance



SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2without oil pumpOnce the compressor has received starting per-mission, make sure that the capacity slide is in minimum position.

Start the compressor and wait for a signal from the oil flow switch for max 50+10 sec.

If there is no signal from the oil flow switch for 10 sec during operation, the compressor will stop.

Alarm surveillance



SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pumpOnce the compressor has received starting per-mission, the pump will start. The built-in spring en-sures that the capacity slide is in minimum posi-tion.





High/low oil temperature 300 sec

















117/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_432

_en.

fm

Start the compressor and wait for a signal from the oil flow switch for max 50+10 sec.

If there is no signal from the oil flow switch for 10 sec during operation, the compressor will stop.

The oil pump runs continually during operation to ensure sufficient pressure to move the capacity slide.



SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pumpOnce the compressor has received starting per-mission, the pump will start. The built-in spring en-sures that the capacity slide is in minimum posi-tion.

The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication system and when the oil flow switch is activated, the prelubrication period will begin.

When this period has expired, the compressor will start, and the pump will work for 300 sec and then stop.

In case of a booster compressor, the pump will run continually during operation to ensure suffi-cient pressure to move the capacity slide.




Reciprocating compressorsNo particular starting up sequence exists for recip-rocating compressors. However, some alarms are delayed at this stage.

Alarm surveillance



The following descriptions of the various functions must be compared with the wiring diagrams in which the activating connections are included.

External starting permission - immediate stopThe input must be connected in order for the com-pressor to run in MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE. If this input is opened during operation, the com-pressor will stop immediately.

When the input is open, STOPPED will appear in the bottom line of the display.












High oil pressure 20 sec

Low suct.gas superheat 15 sec

High suct.gas superheat 300 sec


Low disch. gas superheat 300 sec

Low/high intermediate discharge temperature

300 sec


118/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

External starting permission -normal stopThis input and IMMEDIATE STOP must be con-nected before the compressor is going to start in AUTO or REMOTE. If the input has not been con-nected, the display will read STOPPED in the bot-tom line.

If the input is opened during operation, the com-pressor capacity will move to its minimum posi-tion, and the compressor will stop on its delay be-fore the actual time to stop.

In case the input CAPACITY DOWN BLOCKED is connected, the compressor will not reduce capac-ity once the input EXTERNAL STARTING PER-MISSION NORMAL STOP is opened.

Oil charging, manual (screw compressors)Oil charging cannot take place with UNISAB II in "STOPPED". If the compressor is fitted with an oil pump for oil charging, it can be started in the fol-lowing way:

Select menu TIMERS I OIL CHARGING and the following picture will appear:

Place the cursor on TIMER and press G until the cursor moves to the right. Set the number of sec-onds the pump is to run. Press G and move the cursor back to START OIL PUMP. Press G until the cursor moves to the right, then select YES with J or K .

The pump will now start and run for the time set.

For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3 compres-sors a warning "Watch the oil pressure" will be is-

sued while the oil pump is in manual operation for oil charging.

If the pump is to stop before time expiry, select NO under START OIL PUMP.

Note: As from 2001 SAB 128/163 Mk3 and SAB 202 are no longer as standard fitted with a valve for external connection to the oil pump suction side. Thus it is not possible to charge oil with the unit oil pump.

Motor current measuringUNISAB II can be supplied with a signal 0-1 Amp AC directly from a current transformer in the com-pressor motor starter.

The value for the voltage ratio of the current trans-former must be entered in the menu CONFIG I RANGE M. CURR to get a correct reading of the current.

Next, select menu MOTOR I MOTOR CUR-RENT and the following picture will appear:

In SET POINT 1 enter the motor full load current of the motor as read on the name plate. In SET POINT 2 a lower value may be entered if the ab-sorbed current is to be limited in certain periods.

Set points are set by placing the cursor on SET POINT 1 or SET POINT 2 respectively. Press G until the cursor moves to the right. The correct number can now be set by using J or K .

It is possible to change between two set points by opening or closing a digital input. See wiring dia-grams.

Open input = SET POINT 1.

See also Current limiters.

START OIL PUMP NO

TIMER 0 sec

ACTUAL SP XX A

SET POINT 1 XX A

SET POINT 2 XX A


119/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_432

_en.

fm

Motor power measuringUNISAB II can be supplied with a 4-20 mA signal from a power transmitter of 0-xxxx KW.

Enter the power ratio of the power transmitter in the menu CONFIG I RANGE M. CURR to get a correct reading of the power output.

In the menu CALIB I CALIBRATE COP, select MOTOR SIGNAL for kW.

Then select the menu MOTOR I MOTOR POW-ER, and the following picture will appear:

In SET POINT 1 enter the motor top load power read on the name plate. In SET POINT 2 a lower value can be entered for periods when less power is required.

Switch between the two set points by opening or closing a digital input, cf wiring diagrams.

Open input = SET POINT 1.

See also Current limiter

COP set-upUNISAB II can be set for measuring compressor COP (Coefficient Of Performance), mechanical efficiency as well as Carnot efficiency.

Together with suction and discharge pressure and temperature, the following values form basis of the calculations:

• Temperature of chilled liquid before evapo-rator.

• Volume flow of cooling gas on pressure side (m3/h).

• Motor power consumption in kW.

• Motor efficiency.

The measuring of these values are set in the pic-ture CONFIG I COP.

The COP function is connected and disconnected in the menu SETTING I CONFIG I COP AC-TIVE, cf section Configuration.

The calculated COP values are shown in the pic-ture SETTING I DIAGNOSIS I COP.

A more comprehensive description of the COP funtion and its setting is included in the manual UNISAB II-COP.

Thermistor connectionIf the motor is fitted with thermistors for protection of the motor temperature, these can be connected directly to a digital input. See wiring diagrams.

Should the motor temperature rise excessively, the compressor will stop.

Aux. outputIn the menu CALIB I AUX. OUTPUT the follow-ing picture will appear:

The cursor is on AUX. OUTPUT. Press G and the cursor moves to NOT USED.

With J or K choose between:

• READY

• AT MIN CAP.

• AT MAX CAP.

• RUNNING

ACTUAL SP xxxx KW

SET POINT 1 xxxx KW

SET POINT 2 xxxx KW

COP ACTIVE NO

FLOW FACTOR 0.20 l/pls

LIQ. SUBCOOL 3.0

AUX. OUTPUT

ACTIVATED WHEN

NOT USED


120/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

• READY-EXT.

This function is connected to a digital output. See wiring diagrams.

1) READY: If selecting this function, the output will be activated when the compressor is ready for operation in REMOTE. This means that AUTO START has been config-ured (and AUTO STOP), EXTERNAL START NORMAL STOP has been set. There are no alarms - and the compressor can start.

2) AT MIN CAP: If selecting this function, the output will be activated when the compres-sor is below LOW LIMIT, which is set in the menu CALIB I CAP. LIMIT. The hysterisis is 1%.

3) AT MAX CAP: Select this function and the output is activated when the compressor is above HIGH LIMIT, which is set in the menu CALIB I CAP. LIMIT. The hysterisis is 1%.

Please note that the line CAP.LIMITER is not in-cluded in the CALIBRATION menu until the auxil-iary output has been selected as either AT MIN. CAP. or AT MAX. CAP.

4) RUNNING: If selecting this function, the out-put will be activated whenever the compres-sor is operating, ie when the start signal to the compressor has been set.

5) READY-EXT.: This function corresponds to the above READY function, but here it is not required that EXTERNAL START NORMAL STOP must be set for the output to be acti-vated. The function works both in REMOTE and AUTO.

Capacity down blockedWhen the compressor is in max capacity in AUTO or REMOTE, it is possible to lock the compressor

in this state by closing a digital input. See wiring diagrams. The input overrules EXTERNAL STARTING PERMISSION, NORMAL STOP.

In case the compressor runs in limited operation, it will, however, reduce its capacity. When the state of operation is back to normal, the compres-sor will return to full load. See also Limitations.

If the input is connected while the compressor is READY to start in AUTO or REMOTE, the com-pressor will be started by force.

Power management system (PMS)This function works in MANUAL, AUTO or RE-MOTE operation. It is a kind of "an agreement to start" system, consisting of one digital output "Compressor ready to start", which is set when the compressor is to start, as well as a digital input "Permission to start OK". This input must be set before the timer "PMS confirmation" expires in or-der for the compressor to start.

The alarm "Power management system error" is activated if the input "Permission to start OK" has not been set before the timer "PMS confirmation" expires.

The signal can be removed during operation with-out stopping the compressor.

Cold store functionThis function is connected to the regulators for ca-pacity regulation of the compressor.

Usually, the compressor is going to start in AUTO or REMOTE/MULITSAB if the measured value is outside the neutral zone and a capacity require-ment exists.

If COLD STORE FUNCTION has been selcected in the menu CONFIG, the compressor will not start until the measured value is outside the P


121/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_432

_en.

fm

Band. After this, it will regulate normally in accord-ance with the set point.

Fig. 7.1

Note on screw compressorsIt is not recommended to use the cold store function on screw compressors!

HP on TWO-STAGEThis function is used on two-stage plants to start HP compressors by force.

HP on TWO-STAGE must have been selected in the menu CONFIG. The function only works in REMOTE/MULTISAB.

A compressor is started by force by closing the in-put EXT START, NORMAL STOP. The first com-

pressor is now going to start within the period of time set in the timer START HPRESS.

After this, the compressors will regulate normally on the capacity regulator.

Please note that the last compressor in operation in a MULTISAB system (usually the no 1 com-pressor in the starting sequence) will not stop on the timer STOP DELAY. It can only be stopped by opening the input EXT START, NORMAL STOP, which makes the compressor stop for a moment.

Oil return (reciprocating compressors)The solenoid valve for oil return from the oil sepa-rator/oil reservoir to the compressor will be open when the compressor starts and an ON signal is issued from one digital input (or in the case of two-stage compressors two digital input).

In case of a one-stage compressor, only the digital input for high-pressure oil separator is used. Here, the input must be ON before the digital output oil return is set.

In case of two-stage compressors where both the IP and HP part may have their own oil separator, the digital inputs INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE OIL RETURN and HIGH PRESSURE OIL RE-TURN are used. Here, both inputs must be ON before setting the digital output for oil return.

From version 1.10 the opening of the solenoid valve(s) for oil return can be combined with an ad-justable time delay.

At compressor start the output(s) for oil return is/are not opened until the time set in the timer OIL RETURN has expired.

The time delay function will be disconnected if the timer OIL RETURN is set for 0 sec or when the digital inputs for intermediate and high pressure oil return are OFF.

-40-38

-331

Pb = 5 K

Pb = 5 K

Nz = 4 K

-40-38

1-33

Pb = 5 K

Pb = 5 K

Nz = 4 K

1

Suct.press (°C/R)

NORMAL

Example of cold store function

UNISAB II is set for suction pressure regulation with

Set point (Sp) = -40°CNeutral zone (Nz) = 4 KProportional band (Pb) = 5 K

Compressor start(Just outside Nz)

COLD STORE FUNCTION

Suct.press (°C/R)

Compressor start(Just outside Pb)

1


122/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

The time delay OIL RETURN is set in the timer picture TIMER I TIMER SETUP.

Oil heating Oil heating is NOT a configuration point, but it has various functions depending on whether the com-pressor in question is configured as a reciprocat-ing or a screw compressor.

Screw compressorsA heating element will be connected while the compressor is not in operation and there is no temperature regulation.


The heating element outlet is activated by de-creasing oil temperature. This function is active both at compressor stand-still and when the com-pressor is in operation.

The set point of this value is set in picture OIL TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 2. The set point has a fixed hysteresis of 5K.

Ex: Set point 2 = 35°C: Heating starts at 35°C and stops at (35+5) = 40°C.

Definition of refrigerant R000If the refrigerant used cannot be found in the list of refrigerants - see section Configuration - it is pos-sible to select a user defined refrigerant designat-ed R000 (the R000 designation does not refer to any known refrigerant).

Before selecting R000 in SETUP I CONFIG en-ter the data for the substances (the refrigerant curve) contained in the refrigerant used.

In the menu SETUP I CALIB I DEF. REFRIG-ERANT R000, the following picture will appear:

DEF. REFRIGERANT R000

TEMP: PRESS (ABS):

-90 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-85 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-80 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-75 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-70 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-65 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-60 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-55 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-50 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-45 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-40 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-35 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-30 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-25 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-20 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-15 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-10 °C/R 00.00 BAR

-5 °C/R 00.00 BAR

00 °C/R 00.00 BAR

05 °C/R 00.00 BAR

10 °C/R 00.00 BAR

15 °C/R 00.00 BAR

20 °C/R 00.00 BAR


123/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_432

_en.

fm

For BAR/°C, enter the pressure as absolute pres-sure in 1/100 BAR. For temperatures enter values between -90°C and +80°C with intervals of 5°C. Each pressure value in the table must be given a certain value.

The pressure can be entered in the range of 00.00 and 99.99 BAR. The table has been initialized to 00.00 BAR.

25 °C/R 00.00 BAR

30 °C/R 00.00 BAR

35 °C/R 00.00 BAR

40 °C/R 00.00 BAR

45 °C/R 00.00 BAR

50 °C/R 00.00 BAR

55 °C/R 00.00 BAR

60 °C/R 00.00 BAR

65 °C/R 00.00 BAR

70 °C/R 00.00 BAR

75 °C/R 00.00 BAR

80 °C/R 00.00 BAR


124/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

8. Calibration

125/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_433

_en_

2.02

.fm

8. CalibrationBefore initial compressor start-up and after service1), adjustments of transducers and position transmitters must be carried out. Their values have usually been preset by the factory, but a re-check must be made before start-up. This is very important as failure to adjust may lead to malfunc-tion during operation.

1) Eg in connection with replacement of CPU prints, relay prints, pressure transducers or batter-ies. See also section Service.

Insufficient or incorrect setting of pressure transducers may lead to compressor breakdown or personal injury.

The temperature sensors must be calibrated as they are connected electrically with four conduc-tors, which automatically makes up for line resist-ance.

Pressure transducersCalibrate the pressure transducers at atmos-pheric pressure in the compressor.

Use the following pressure transducers:

Table 10

Unit = BAR COMPRESSOR TYPE Max.

permissibledeviation at

ATM.PRESS

MEAS.POINT SAB/VMY SMC TSMC/

TCMO

HPC/HPO MAX.

PRESS.

SUCT.PRESS.-1-+9 -1-+9 -1-+9 -1-+25

33

55

+/- 0.2+/- 0.5

DISCH.PRESS-1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+59

55

200

+/- 0.5+/- 1.2

OIL PRESS -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5

DIFF PRESS -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5

INTERM.PRESS -1-+25 55 +/- 0.5

8. Calibration

126/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Select the menu CALIBRATE, and the following picture will be displayed:

Note that some of the entries in the CALIBRATE menu are described in other chapters of this man-ual.

With the cursor on PRESS.TRANSDUCER, press I and the following picture will appear:

Note: The pressure values shown are examples only. At atmospheric pressure the value of the pressure transducer must be within the limits for "Max. permissible deviation at atm.pressure" as indicated in the above table. Is this not the case, the value will be outside its tolerance and must be replaced.

The pressure levels are measured in BAR (rela-tive pressure) and at atmospheric pressure the reading must show 0.0 Bar to be correct.

As it appears from the above example, the meas-ured pressure levels are not 0.0 Bar. Consequent-ly calibration must be carried out.

Place the cursor on SUCT. ADJUST and use the G key to change the value.

Now change the value to the value SUCT. AD-JUST is showin, ie 0.2 Bar with opposite sign. Note that the adjusting value is in 1/100.

Change SUCT. ADJUST to the value -.20.

Adjust the other pressure levels in the same way. However, note that DIFF. PRESS is relevant only for screw compressors and IMED. PRESS only for two-stage reciprocating compressors.

The following picture should now appear:

The pressure transducer calibration has now been carried out correctly.

Brine temperaturePlace the cursor on BRINE TEMP and press the I key once. The following picture will appear:

The BRINE TEMP value is the immediate value measured by the sensor. If a test measuring with a precision thermometer shows eg 18.7°C at the sensor, adjustment can be made.

CALIBRATE

PRESS.TRANSDUCER

BRINE TEMP

CAPACITY

MOTOR FREQ

Vi POSITION

4 - 20 mA INPUT

AUX. OUTPUT

CAP. LIMITS

DEF. REFRIGERANT R000

SUCT. PRESS .20 BAR

SUCT. ADJUST .00 BAR

DISC. PRESS -0.3 BAR

DISC. ADJUST .00 BAR

OIL PRESS 0.1 BAR

OIL ADJUST .00 BAR

DIFF. PRESS -0.1 BAR

DIFF. ADJUST .00 BAR

IMED. PRESS 0.1 BAR

IMED. ADJUST .00 BAR

SUCT. PRESS .00 BAR

SUCT. ADJUST -.20 BAR

DISC. PRESS 0.0 BAR

DISC. ADJUST .30 BAR

OIL PRESS 0.0 BAR

OIL ADJUST -.10 BAR

DIFF. PRESS 0.0 BAR

DIFF. ADJUST ..10 BAR

IMED. PRESS 0.0 BAR

IMED. ADJUST -.10 BAR

BRINE TEMP 18.9°C

BRINE ADJUST 0.0°C

8. Calibration

127/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_433

_en_

2.02

.fm

Place the cursor on BRINE ADJUST and change the value to -0.2°C. BRINE TEMP will now be 18.7°C (18.9-0.2), and adjustment has taken place.

Note that it is only possible to adjust BRINE TEMP - not the other temperature sensors.

Calibration of capacity slide signalSoftware calibration of the capacity slide position signal can be used if it is not possible to calibrate the transmitter itself. See below for information on software calibration.

Calibration of Vi slide signal

Software calibration of the Vi slide position signal

can be used if it is not possible to calibrate the transmitter itself. See below for information on software calibration.

Calibration of motor frequency signalWhen compressor capacity is regulated wholly or partly by changes in the motor speed, the motor frequency signal from the frequency converter can be calibrated in this menu field.

Motor currentThe reading of motor current can be calibrated as described in section Configuration, pos. 19.

Hydraulic slide systems (certain screw compressors)The built-in capacity slide position transmitter as well as the Vi slide position transmitter must be adjusted correctly to ensure safe and stable slide control. This adjustment must always be carried out mechanically as described in section Trans-mitter adjustment. Additionally, the capacity signal

can be adjusted by software as described in sec-tion Software adjustment.

Software adjustmentWhen the capacity position transmitter has been adjusted mechanically (see section Transmitter adjustment), it can be fine adjusted by selecting SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY.

Follow the same procedure as described for ca-pacity slide calibration in section Transmitter ad-justment.

0 % calibration is carried out with the capacity slide in minimum position. If CAPACITY is not showing 0.0 %, but eg 1.5 %, position the cursor on CAP. ZERO AD and change the calibration val-ue to -1.5 % with the G key.

100 % calibration is carried out with the capacity slide in maximum position. If CAPACITY is not showing 100.0 %, but eg 95.8 %, position the cursor on CAP. 100 ADJ and change the calibration value to 4.2 % with the G key.

Transmitter adjustment To ensure a safe and stable movement of the slides, the built-in position transmitter must be ad-justed correctly in the mechanical minimum and maximum of the slide. Furthermore, the slide ve-locity must be adjusted so that hunting is avoided. See also Adjusting slide velocity in section Com-pressor regulation.

Position transmitterFor measuring of slide position, the compressor is fitted with a position transmitter, which yields 4 - 20 mA to UNISAB II. There will always be fitted a transmitter at the capacity slide whereas there

CAPACITY XXX.X %

CAP. ZERO AD XX.X %

CAP. 100 ADJ XX.X %

8. Calibration

128/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

may be fitted a transmitter at the volume ratio slide in case the compressor is made for automatic Vi

regulation.

There are four types of position transmitter.

Turning Transmitter(for capacity and Vi) for SAB

110, SAB 128, SAB 163 and SAB 202.

Fig. 8.1

Long-Stroke Capacity Rod Transmitter for SAB 110, SAB 128, SAB 163, SAB 202, SAB 81, SAB 83, SAB 85, SAB 87, SAB 89 and SAB 330.

Fig. 8.2

Long-Stroke Capacity Rod Transmitter for SAB 283.

Fig. 8.3

Short-Stroke Transmitter for SAB 283, SAB 355 Vi, from Gram Refrigeration to GSV, RWF capac-ity and Vi) and capacity for GST.

Fig. 8.4

Adjusting capacity measuring system for turning transmitterThe turning transmitter has two ways of adjust-ment. The cover must be removed before adjust-ment.

In the following drawing(see Fig. 8.5) the zero and span adjusting screws of the position transmitter are shown.

13

No. 3

2

0%2.

2.5

3.

4.54.3.5

SPAN + ZERO

100%

32 1

ALU-Tube

32 1

ALU-Tube

8. Calibration

129/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_433

_en_

2.02

.fm

Fig. 8.5

With the cap/Vi slide in minimum position, adjust

zero until the display shows 0%. With the cap/Vi

slide at maximum positon, adjust span until the display shows 100%.

Capacity slide adjustment

Start the compressor in MANUAL and make sure that the capacity slide is in minimum. Adjust the zero screw of the transmitter until the display shows 0%.

Now bring the slide to its maximum position (eg when the current consumption is no longer rising), and adjust the span until the display shows 100%.

Return the slide to minimum and check.

Capacity slide adjustment, manual Vi

Follow the same procedure as above, but note that adjustment must be made each time the Vi

position is changed.

Capacity slide adjustment, auto Vi

To adjust the movement of the capacity slide the Vi slide must be in minimum position. The Vi slide

is brought to minimum the following way: Start the compressor in MANUAL, select SETUP I and then CAPACITY I.

The following picture will appear:

Select the Vi POSITION and press I to the follow-

ing picture:

0.0% in this picture indicates that UNISAB II will adjust the Vi slide automatically.

Change SETPOINT 1 to -10% which will change the Vi adjustment to manual and place the Vi slide

in minimum position.

Adjust the capacity slide position as above under Capacity slide adjustment.

Capacity slide adjustment, auto zero point

For SAB 202 compressors with automatic zero point setting, there are two applicable methods to ensure that the automatic zero point setting does not influence the adjusting of the transmitter zero.

1) Do not set the zero until the compressor has stopped and the slide is in mechanical zero.

13

No. 3

2

0%2.

2.5

3.

4.54.3.5

SPAN + ZERO

100%

T0177063_0

1 = 4 - 20 mA2 = + 24 VDC3 = GND

Slide position

Volume ratio

Approx min pos 0%

KAPACITY XX

CAP. POS XX

VI POSITION XX

RUNNING XX

SETPOINT 1 0.0%

8. Calibration

130/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

2) Disconnect the automatic zero point setting while setting the transmitter zero. This can be done by setting MANUAL ZERO = 0.1 in the pic-ture SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR.

Remember to set MANUAL ZERO = 0.0 as soon as the capacity slide adjustment is accomplished. It is important that the compressor only runs for a brief period of time when the automatic zero point setting is disconnected.

Volume ratio slide adjustment, auto Vi

It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set correctly.

Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the slide up to 20-30%.

Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION I and the fol-lowing picture will appear:

In this picture 0.0% will always mean that the Vi

slide will be adjusted automatically by UNISAB II.

Change SETPOINT 1 to -10%, which changes the Vi adjustment to manual and places the Vi slide in

minimum position.

Return with H to the picture:

and adjust the zero screw of the Vi position trans-

mitter until the reading out for the Vi-position is 0% in the display.

Change SET POINT 1 to 110% and return to the above picture where the Vi position is now going

to rise. Wait until it does not rise any further and

adjust the span screw of the transmitter until the display shows 100%.

Change SET POINT 1 to -10% and check mini-mum.

Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0% for automatic Vi

control. Besides, UNISAB II will change to auto-matic Vi control itself after the compressor has

been stopped.

See also Adjusting slide velocity in the Compres-sor regulation section.

Adjusting capacity measuring system for Long-Stroke Capacity Rod for SAB 110, SAB 128, SAB 163, SAB 202, SAB 81, SAB 83, SAB 85, SAB 87, SAB 89 and SAB 330As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted with a single calibration button surrounded by a green and red LED.

Fig. 8.6

During normal operation the red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED is switched on con-stantly when the transmitter is in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is in 0% position.

Calibration is carried out as follows:

Note: Make sure that UNISAB II is not in alarm.

SETPOINT 1 0.0%

CAPACITY XX

CAP. POS XX

VI POSITION XX

RUNNING XX

LED-SupplyCalibration push botton

LED-Digital output

Plug Connection

Out 4-20mA

Supply +24V DC

Common-GND

8. Calibration

131/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_433

_en_

2.02

.fm

1) Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five minutes before calibration.

2) Press the calibration button for five seconds to get the transmitter in calibration mode. The red LED will change from normal flash to OFF.

3) With stopped compressor, press the calibra-tion button once. The red LED will switch ON immediately. After ten seconds the red LED will turn OFF again, indicating that it is ready for 100% calibration.

4) Start the compressor and increase capacity to its maximum, and press the calibration button twice. The red LED will start flashing quickly. After ten seconds the red LED will change to normal flash rate, indicating that the calibration has been completed.To make sure that the slide is in maximum physical position, (UNISAB II does not allow the capacity button to be activated after 100% indication in the display has been reached) it is recommended to set “CAP 100 ADJ” at -10% after 100% calibration of the transmitter has been completed and the slide remains in maximum position. See the Software Calibration section earlier in this section. The slide indication in the display must now be 90%. If capacity can be in-creased further either automatically by UN-ISAB II or by pressing the “UP” capacity but-ton, the slide has not yet been calibrated correctly.

5) If capacity could be increased to more than 90%, cf. above, calibrate the slide again from point 1 but keep -10% in “CAP 100 ADJ”.

6) Reset “CAP 100 ADJ” at what it was before the calibration or until the capacity shows 100%.

7) The calibration will be remembered even in case of a power failure.

To return to “Factory Set Point”, press the CAL. Switch for twenty seconds. The green and red LED will give a short flash (one after the other). The 4-20 mA signal from the transmitter is perma-nently available. However, during calibration the signal is based on the default calibration values, so it will not show 0% at minimum capacity nor 100% at maximum capacity!

Note that it is possible to return to the default cal-ibration values by keeping the CAL Switch pressed for twenty seconds. However, it is the transmitter manufacturer's default values, which are reset. These values may differ very much from the correct values for the compressor in question. Reset is indicated by the red and green LED flash-ing briefly a couple of times.

Adjusting Long-Stroke Capacity Rod for SAB 283.

For type part no. 1373-038

Note: For long-stroke transmitters with part no. 1373-057 calibration and terminal connection are similar to that of SAB 110, SAB 128 etc. Please see section on preceeding page.

As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted with a single calibration button surrounded by a green and red LED. During normal operation the red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED is switched on constantly when the transmitter is in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is in 0% position.

8. Calibration

132/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 8.7



1. Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five minutes before calibration.

2. With stopped compressor, press the calibra-tion button once. The red LED will switch ON. After ten seconds the red LED will turn OFF to indicate readiness for 100% calibra-tion.

3. Start the compressor and move the pis-ton/alu tube to 100% position and press the calibration button again. The red LED will start flashing quickly. After ten seconds the calibration will be completed and the red LED will flash normally.

4) To make sure that the slide is in maximum physical position, (UNISAB II does not allow the capacity button to be activated after 100% indication in the display has been reached) it is recommended to set “CAP 100 ADJ” at -10% after 100% calibration of the transmitter has been completed and the

slide remains in maximum position. See the Software Calibration section earlier in this section. The slide indication in the display must now be 90%. If capacity can be in-creased further either automatically by UN-ISAB II or by pressing the “UP” capacity but-ton, the slide has not yet been calibrated correctly.

5) If capacity could be increased to more than 90%, cf. above, calibrate the slide again from point 1 but keep -10% in “CAP 100 ADJ”.

6) Reset “CAP 100 ADJ” at what it was before the calibration or until the capacity shows 100%.

Adjusting Short-Stroke Capacity RodFor part no. 1373-037

Note: For short-stroke transmitters with part no. 1373-061 calibration and terminal connection are similar to that of SAB 100, SAB 128 etc. Please see preceeding section.

3

2 1

2 = 1 =

3 =

3

74mm

60mm

2 1

DIA.7mm

2 = COMMON -, 0V DC1 = SUPPLY, +11 to 32V DC

3 = OUT, 4-20mA

= GND

PLUG CONNECTION:

Long-Stroke SAB 283

LED-digitaloutput (option)

Calibration‘s push button

LED-supply/operation

8. Calibration

133/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_433

_en_

2.02

.fm

for GST, GSV and RWF from Gram Refrigeration and short-stroke volumen rod for GSV, RWF and SAB 283 and SAB 355.

Fig. 8.8

As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted with a single calibration button surrounded by a green and red LED. During normal operation the red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED is switched on constantly when the transmitter is in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is in 0% position.

Capacity calibration is carried out as follows:


1. Apply supply voltage for a minimum five minutes before calibration.

2. With stopped compressor, press the calibra-tion button once. The red LED will switch ON. After ten seconds the red LED will turn OFF to indicate readiness for 100% calibra-tion.

3. Start the compressor and move the pis-ton/alu tube to 100% position and press the

calibration button again. The red LED will start flashing quickly. After ten seconds the calibration will be completed and the red LED will flash normally.

Capacity slide adjustment, auto Vi

The capacity slide movement must be adjusted with the Vi slide in minimum position.

The Vi slide is taken to minimum position in the fol-

lowing way:

Start the compressor in MANUAL and select CA-PACITY I . The following picture will appear:

Select VI POSITION and press I to the following

picture:




minimum position.

Adjust the capacity slide position as described above under Capacity slide adjustment.

Capacity slide adjustment, auto zero pointFor SAB 202 compressors with automatic zero point setting, two methods can be used to ensure that the automatic zero point setting does not af-fect the adjustment of the transmitter zero.

1. Do not set the zero until the compressor has stopped and the slide is in mechanical zero.

1 = 2 = 3 =

=

Short-Stroke

LED-SupplyCalibration push botton

LED-Digital output

Plug Connection

Supply, 24V DCCommon -, 0V DCOut, 4-20mA

GND

CAPACITY XX

CAP. POS XX

VI POSITION XX

RUNNING XX

SETPOINT 1 0.0%

8. Calibration

134/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

2. Disconnect the automatic zero point setting while setting the transmitter zero. This is done by setting MANUAL ZERO = 0.1 in the picture SETUP I CONFIG.Remember to set MANUAL ZERO = 0.0 once the capacity slide adjustment has been completed. The compressor is only allowed to run for a brief period of time with the automatic zero point setting dis-connected.

Volume ratio slide adjustment, auto Vi

It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set correctly.

Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the slide up to 20-30%.

Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION and the fol-lowing picture will appear:




minimum position.

Return with H to the picture:

Wait until Vi does not decrease any further and push the calibration button once. The red LED is now constantly ON. After 10 sec. the red LED will turn OFF to indicate that it is ready for 100% cali-bration.

Change SET POINT 1 to 110% and return to the above picture where the Vi position will increase.

Wait until it does not increase any further and push the calibration button once again. The red LED will flash quickly and after 10 sec. the calibra-tion is completed and the red LED will flash nor-mally.

Change SET POINT 1 to -10% and check mini-mum.

Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0% for automatic Vi

control. UNISAB II will change to automatic Vi

control after the compressor has been stopped.

See also Adjusting slide velocity in section Com-pressor regulation.

Electrical slide systems (certain screw compressors)The built-in capacity slide position transmitter must be adjusted correctly to ensure safe and sta-ble slide control. This adjustment must always be carried out as described in section Transmitter ad-justment.Afterwards, the capacity signal must be adjusted by software as described in sectionSoftware adjustment.

Manual slide positioning

In contrary to hydraulic slides, the electrical ca-pacity slide can be positioned manually for test. This is useful both when performing transmitter adjustment and software adjustment.

Select SETUP I CONTROL I COMPRESSOR-CONTROL = STOPPED and then SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY. The picture shown in section Software adjustment will appear. While this picture is open (and still STOPPED mode), it is possible to move the capacity slide by means of the E and F buttons.

SETPOINT 1 0.0%

CAPACITY XX

CAP. POS XX

VI POSITION XX

RUNNING XX

8. Calibration

135/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_433

_en_

2.02

.fm

Note that when reaching the end stop, the alarm CAPACITY ERROR will be displayed after two seconds. Release the button at once and reset the alarm.

Transmitter adjustmentThe capacity transmitter is fitted with a single cal-ibration button surrounded by a green and a red LED as shown in the drawing.

Fig. 8.9

During normal operation the red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED is switched on con-stantly when the transmitter is in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is in 0% position.


1. Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five minutes before calibration.

2. Press the calibration button for five seconds to get the transmitter in calibration mode. The red LED will change from normal flash to OFF.

3. Decrease capacity to its minimum and press the calibration button once. The red LED will turn ON. After ten seconds the red LED will turn OFF again, indicating that the posi-

tion transmitter is ready for 100% calibra-tion.

4. Increase capacity to its maximum and press the calibration button twice. The red LED will start flashing quickly. After ten seconds the red LED will change to normal flash rate, indicating that calibration has been complet-ed.

It is possible to ignore points 3 or 4 or both. Press-ing the calibration button for five seconds in cali-bration mode will bring the transmitter back to nor-mal operation mode.

The 4-20 mA signal from the transmitter is perma-nently available. However, during calibration the signal is based on the default calibration values,

Normallynot visible.

remove coverFor calibration

LED-Position(green)

Calibrationpush button LED-Working

(red)

8. Calibration

136/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

so it will not show 0% at minimum capacity nor 100% at maximum capacity!

Note that it is possible to return to the default cal-ibration values by keeping the CAL Switch pressed for twenty seconds. However, it is the transmitter manufacturer's default values, which are reset. These values may differ very much from the correct values for the compressor in question. Reset is indicated by the red and green LED flash-ing briefly a couple of times.

Software adjustmentWhen the capacity position transmitter has been adjusted (see section Transmitter adjustment), the capacity must be further adjusted. It is recom-mended to introduce a calculation offset of 2% to ensure that the slide does not collide with the end stops. Collisions will reduce slide motor service life, etc.

Select SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY

Decrease capacity to its minimum. Change CAP. ZERO AD so that a value of -2.0% is displayed for CAPACITY.If capacity is eg 0.3 % (when CAP. ZERO AD = 0.0%), select CAP. ZERO AD = - 2.3%.

Increase capacity to its maximum. Change CAP 100 ADJ so that a value of 102.0 % is displayed for CAPACITY.If capacity is eg 100.3% (when CAP 100ADJ = 0.0

%), select CAP 100ADJ = 1.7 %.

Factory settingDuring configuration it is possible to bring UNISAB II back to its factory settings.

If a factory reset is carried out, the following points will be affected:

- Alarm and warning limits

- Timer setup

- Regulator settings

- State of control

The factory settings appear from the tables in sec-tions Alarms and Warnings, Timers as well as Compressor regulation.

Before carring out factory reset, STOP the com-pressor.

Select CONFIG I FACTORY RESET and change from NO to YES.

Now press H and UNISAB II will display the fol-lowing:

Within a few seconds the operation will be com-pleted and UNISAB II can be adjusted to the actu-al operating conditions.

REMEMBER to fill in the forms for actual settings.

These forms are included in the Starting-up Man-ual.

CAPACITY XXX.X %

CAP. ZERO AD XX.X %

CAP 100 ADJ XX.X %

CONFIGURATION CHANGED

RESTARTS!

PLEASE WAIT

9. Trouble shooting

137/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_434

_en_

2.02

.fm

9. Trouble shooting

If irregularities occur in connection with the run-ning of the compressor, it is possible to inspect UNISAB II to determine the cause of these irregu-larities.

Please note that even though the voltage to UNISAB II is disconnected, there may still be live wires containing unknown voltage.

Before beginning the trouble-shooting, disconnect the main supply to the compressor motor to pre-vent it from starting inadvertently.

There are light diodes on the printed circuit board. These diodes make it possible to state the condi-tion of the in- and outputs. It is also possible to en-ter different menu pictures and have various states displayed.

Finally, UNISAB II includes a function, which in case of an alarm will store the operating situation including time and date. This makes it possible subsequently to inspect this information on the display, which is particularly useful when search-ing for the cause of a compressor shutdown.

In this way UNISAB II can store up to 30 alarm sit-uations where the most recent alarm will replace the oldest one.

An interruption of the voltage to UNISAB II will not cause any loss of information. Thus, the informa-tion can be displayed again once the supply volt-age has been restored.

Diagnosis picturesIf the menu DIAGNOSIS is selected, the following picture will appear:

1) Diagnosis I Insp. old alarmsWith the cursor in this field and a pressure on I a picture with the most recent alarm will appear.

Example:

The picture shows that on 15 July 1994 at 07:40 hrs an alarm was activated due to high discharge pressure.

To inspect old alarms, press K and the previous alarm will appear.

When the alarm of interest is displayed, press I and the following picture will appear:

Under this menu every piece of operating informa-tion which existed at the moment of the alarm is stored.

DIAGNOSIS

1 INSPECT OLD ALARMS

2 MISC. FUNCTIONS

3 SOFTWARE VERSION

4 DIGITAL INPUTS

5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

6 ANALOG INPUTS

7 ANALOG OUTPUTS

8 NO OF ALARMS

9 SUPERUSER PASSWORD

10 SERIAL NUMBER

11 EXAMINE MEMORY

12 NEW PASSWORD

13 POWER ON

14 ZERO CAPACITY POS.

15 COP

16 PROFICOM

17 ROTATUNE PISTON

ALARM 940715-0740

HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE

1 CTRL STATE

2 MEASURE VALUES

3 IMPUT STATE

4 OUTPUT STATE

9. Trouble shooting

138/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

In the alarm situation HIGH DISCHARGE PRES-SURE, do as follows to inspect the situations 1-4.

With the cursor on CTRL STATE and I the fol-lowing picture will appear:

The compressor has been in MANUAL mode and has been limited due to high pressure. Further-more, it has been programmed to START NO 1 and SYSTEM NO 1.

Use H to go back to the menu, select MEASURE VALUES and press I ,and the following picture will appear:

This picture shows all the measuring values con-nected to the above alarm. Note that not all values are relevant for all compressor types.

If a different alarm situation is selected, a similar set of measuring values will appear.

Use H to get back to the menu, select INPUT STATE and press I , and the following picture will appear:

Here the state of all digital inputs connected to the selected alarm can be read.

0 = The input has been open1 = The input has been closed.

Use H to go back to the menu, select OUTPUT STATE and press I , and the following picture will appear:

CONTROL MANUAL

DISCHARGE LIM

START NO 1

SYSTEM NO 1

SUCT.TEMP 20.3°C

SUCT.PRESS -10.4°C/R

SUCT. SUPERH 30.7°C

DISCH.TEMP 68.7°C

DISCH.PRESS 44.7°C/R

DISCH.SUPERH 24.0°C

BRINE TEMP 22.1°C

OIL TEMP 39.1°C

OIL PRESS 3.9 BAR

DIFF.PRESS 0.0 BAR

INTERM.TEMP 22.1°C

INTERM.PRESS 0.0 BAR

VI POSITION 62.0 %

CAP POSITION 29.8 %

EXT.INPUT 0.0 %

MOTOR CURR 113A

D.INPUT 1 1

D.INPUT 2 1

D.INPUT 3 1

D.INPUT 4 1

D.INPUT 5 0

D.INPUT 6 0

D.INPUT 7 0

D.INPUT 8 0

D.INPUT 9 1

D.INPUT 10 0

D.INPUT 11 0

9. Trouble shooting

139/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_434

_en_

2.02

.fm

Here the state of all digital outputs connected to the selected alarm can be read.

0 = The output has been open1 = The output has been activated.

Tables 11 and 12 below show the numbering of in-/outputs on screw and reciprocating compres-sors respectively.

Return to the previous menu by pressing H :

2) Diagnosis I Misc. functions

This picture includes four items:

The first item SUCT. RAMP L. shows the state of the suction ramp function. See section Limiting functions, Suction ramp.

The value shows the actual suction pressure limit, which will be equal to the suction pressure set point if the suction ramp is not active. When the suction ramp is active, the value will decrease by 1°C every N seconds, where N is the selected val-ue of the SUCT. RAMP timer.

The second item SUCT. SUPERH is the same as the suction superheat set point 2, which is used by the High Discharge Pipe Temperature Limiter. See section Limiting functions, Special limiters.

The third and the fourth items are explained in section Compressor regulation, Electrical slide control.

3) Diagnosis I Software version

Here it can be checked which program version is running in UNISAB II:

Example:

D.OUTPUT 1 0

D.OUTPUT 2 0

D.OUTPUT 3 0

D.OUTPUT 4 0

D.OUTPUT 5 0

D.OUTPUT 6 0

D.OUTPUT 7 0

D.OUTPUT 8 0

D.OUTPUT 9 0

D.OUTPUT 10 0

D.OUTPUT 11 0

D.OUTPUT 12 1

D.OUTPUT 13 1

D.OUTPUT 14 0

D.OUTPUT 15 1

D.OUTPUT 16 1

D.OUTPUT 17 0

D.OUTPUT 18 0

DIAGNOSIS

1 INSPECT OLD ALARMS

2 MISC. FUNCTIONS

3 SOFTWARE VERSION

4 DIGITAL INPUTS

5 DIGITAL OUTPUTS

6 ANALOG INPUTS

7 ANALOG OUTPUTS

8 NO OF ALARMS

9 SUPERUSER PASSWORD

10 SERIAL NUMBER

11 EXAMINE MEMORY

12 NEW PASSWORD

13 POWER ON

14 ZERO CAPACITY POS.

15 COP

16 PROFICOM

17 ROTATUNE PISTON

SUCT. RAMP L X.X°C/R

SUCT. SUPERH XX.X°C

CAPACITY XXX.X SEC

BRAKE DLY X.X SEC

UNISAB II

2.00

YORK Refrigeration

000119 13 : 46

9. Trouble shooting

140/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs

In this picture it is always possible to check the ac-tual state of the digital inputs both at compressor standstill and during operation.

The inputs are numbered from 1 to 11 and their particular status is displayed.

0 = Input open

1 = Input closed

Table 11 below shows the numbering of the in-puts.

5) Diagnosis I Digital outputs

In this picture it is always possible to check the ac-tual state of the digital outputs both at compressor standstill and during operation.

0 = Output open

1 = Output closed

Table 11 below shows the numbering of the out-puts.

6) Diagnosis I Analog inputs

(Pressures, Temperatures, Current)

In this picture it is always possible to check the ac-tual state of the analog inputs both at compressor standstill and during operation.

The picture looks as follows:

It is 12 bit A/D-converted raw values of the input signal which are displayed.

The displayed raw values are interpreted in the following way (see tables below):

Pressure

Pt100

Ext, Cap, Vi

Curr.

Table 12 shows the numbering of the analog inputs.

PRESS INP 1 XXXX

PRESS INP 2 XXXX

PRESS INP 3 XXXX

PRESS INP 4 XXXX

PT 100 INP 1 XXXX

PT 100 INP 2 XXXX

PT 100 INP 3 XXXX

PT 100 INP 4 XXXX

CURR. XXXX

EXT. XXXX

CAP. XXXX

VI. XXXX

Reading 7 752 7310 8191

Input from pres.transmit. (VDC) 0 0.5 4.5 5.0

Reading -2000 -700 +1850 +2000

Temperature (°C) -200 -70 +185 +200

Reading 7 1606 4818 8030

Input (mA) 0 4 12 20

Reading 7 5910

Input (Amp AC) 0 1.0

9. Trouble shooting

141/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_434

_en_

2.02

.fm

7) Diagnosis I Analog outputs

In this menu picture it is possible to see which an-alog output value (in percentage) UNISAB II is transmitting to the equipment to which it is con-nected. The signal is a 4-20 mA signal and is usu-ally used for regulating the speed of a frequency converter. When using analog regulation of the frequency converter, it is possible at the same time to regulate the capacity and Vi slides digitally.

This requires that UNISAB II be fitted with an add-on printed circuit board (UNICOM IF) between re-lay print and CPU print. The add-on board is addi-tional equipment. See section Configuration for detailed information on the use of this board.

As long as the above menu picture is shown in the display, it is possible to select test mode = YES and enter a test value between 0 and 100%. UNISAB II will thus transmit an mA signal corre-sponding to the test value.

Note: Do not let the compressor motor run when using test mode as the motor revolutions will fol-low the changes in the signal. However, test mode can be used to check whether the frequency con-verter receives the signal correctly by reading the analog input signal in the menu system of the con-verter.

8) Diagnosis I No of alarms

The total number of alarms in the working life of the control system is shown here.

Use K and J to inspect the list.

9) Diagnosis I Superuser keyword

In this picture any application of the superuser password including date and hour is registered.

Use K and J to inspect the list.

10) Diagnosis I Serial number

In this picture it is possible to read some of the in-formation related to the EEPROM

The compressor serial no can be read.

The date of compressor start-up (date of initial start-up) can be read.

By using a special password it is possible to erase the EEPROM.

11) Diagnosis I Examine memory This picture is used for software debugging. A section of 8 bytes from the RAM store is shown on the display. The starting address of this section, which is the figure shown at the top to the left, can be changed by means of H I and K J .

12) Diagnosis J New password

In this picture it is possible to change the pass-word. See section Operating the UNISAB II con-trol.

ANALOG OUTPUTS 0.0%

TEST MODE NO

TEST VALUE 0.0%

SERIAL NO 123456

COMMISIONED 950101

ERASE EEPROM NO

0000 00 00 70 3A

0004 00 00 00 00

9. Trouble shooting

142/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

13) Diagnosis I Power onIn this picture it can be checked how many times the power supply for UNISAB II has be reconnect-ed. This menu is used for trouble shooting.

14) Diagnosis I Zero capacity pos.

The current calculated value of the zero point as well as any manual setting value of the zero point can be read in this picture:

(current reading 0-40%)(manual adjustment 0-40%)(immediate slide position, 4-20 mA)(corrected capacity - as read)

15) Diagnosis I COP

UNISAB II can be set to measure the compressor COP values (Coefficient Of Performance) as well as the mechanical efficiency and the Carnot effi-ciency.

The calculated COP values and a number of inter-mediate calculations are shown in this picture:

A more comprehensive description of the COP function and the setting of this can be found in the manual UNISAB II-COP.

16) Diagnosis I PROFICOM

Only for internal use within YORK Refrigera-tion, Marine Group.

In this menu picture it can be checked how UNISAB II communicates with other equipment using PROFIBUS communication. The use of PROFIBUS communication in UNISAB II has not yet been completed. At the moment PROFIBUS can therefore only be used for communication with Mitsubishi PLCs of the type FX2N.

17) Diagnosis I Rotatune piston

Only for internal use.

POWER ON

020606 22:53:31

+00000011

CALCULATED ZERO 22%

MANUAL ZERO 0.0%

CAP.POSITION 66.5%

CAPACITY 100.0%

COP XX.X

COP CARNOT X.XX

COP MECH. X.XX

COOLING OUTPUT XXXX KW

MASS FLOW XXXX kg/h

SHAFT POWER XXXX KW

ABSORBED POWER XXXX KW

MOT. EFFICIENCY XX.X %

VOL. FLOW XXXX m3/h

OVH.SPC.VOL XXXX l/kg

SAT.SPC.VOL XXXX l/kg

ENTALPI H1 XXXX kj/kg



LIQUID TEMP XX.X °C

INIT MESS 0

I/0 LENGTH ERR 0

MODE 0

NEXT 0

9. Trouble shooting

143/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_434

_en_

2.02

.fm

Table 11 - Numbering of digital inputs and outputs

Screw compressorsINPUTS:

1. Compressor motor starter feedback

2. External starting permission - normal stop-ping procedure

3. External starting permission - stop immedi-ately

4. Starting request OK (PMS)

5. Regulator set point no 1 /set point no 2

6. Motor current limit value no 1/limit value no 2

7. Oil pump motor starter feedback

8. Full flow pump (cooling fan) motor starter feedback

9. Oil float switch

10. Capacity down blocked

11. Thermistors in motor windings

OUTPUTS:

1. Capacity down

2. Capacity up

3. Volume down

4. Volume up

5. Economizer - suction line

6. Economizer - liquid line

7. Oil cooling system (HLI/BLI cooling)

8. Oil cooling system (not used in HLI/BLI cool-ing)

9. Oil distribution pipe

10. Oil rectifier (Only MKD configuration; other-wise not used)

11 Heating element

12. Alarm

13. Warning

14. Aux. output (Compressor ready to start at remote control, limit switch for capacity).

15. Starting request (PMS)

16. Compressor motor starting signal

17. Prelubrication pump starting signal

18. Full flow pump (cooling fan) starting signal

Reciprocating compressorsINPUTS:

1. Compressor motor starter feedback

2. External starting permission - normal stop-ping procedure

3. External starting permission - stop immedi-ately

4. Starting request OK(PMS)

5. Regulator set point no 1 /set point no 2

6. Motor current limit value no 1/limit value no 2

7. Thermostat for oil return control. Intermedi-ate pressure oil separator.

8. Thermostat for oil return control. High pres-sure oil separator

9. Not used

10. Capacity down blocked

11. Thermistors in motor windings

OUTPUTS:

1. Capacity stage no 1






9. Trouble shooting

144/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

7. Capacity stage no 7 / intermediate pressure injection

8. Oil cooling / thermo pump / thermo pump solenoid valve for ventilation

9. Oil return

10. Water cooling

11. Heating element

12. Alarm

13. Warning

14. Aux. output, (Compressor ready to start at remote control, limit switch for capacity).

15. Starting request (PMS)

16. Compressor motor starting signal

17. Oil rectifier

18. Not used

9. Trouble shooting

145/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_434

_en_

2.02

.fm

Table 12 - Numbering of analog inputs

Screw compressors

Pressures:

1. Suction pressure-1/+9 bar r

2. Discharge pressure-1/+25 bar r

3. Oil pressure-1/+25 bar r

4. Oil pressure before filter-1/+25 bar r

Temperatures:

1. Suction temperature

2. Discharge temperature

3. Oil temperature

4. Brine or water temperature

Current inputs:

1. Capacity slide position4-20 mA

2. Volume slide position/outside temp.4-20 mA

3. Motor current0-1 A AC

4. External set point / ext. measuring signal4-20 mA


Pressures:

SMC, CMO

1. Suct.press.-/+9 bar r

2. Disch.press. -1/+25 bar r

3. Oil press. -1/+25 bar r

4. Interm.press.Not used

TSMC,TCMO

1. Suct.press.-1/+9 bar r



4. Interm.press.-1/+25 bar r

HPC, HPO

1. Suct.press.-1/+25 bar r



4. Interm.press.Not used

Temperatures:

1. Suction temperature

2. Discharge temperature

3. Oil temperature

4. Brine or water temperature (Intermedi-ate temp. on TSMC, TCMO)

Current inputs:

1. Not used

2. Outside temperature4-20 mA

3. Motor current0-1 A AC

4. External set point /

ext. measuring signal4-20mA

9. Trouble shooting

146/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Printed circuit board, light diodesWhen opening the UNISAB II door, a number of light diodes can be inspected on the printed circuit boards.

The following signals have light diodes:

DIGITAL INPUTS (Green,12 pcs)

DIGITAL OUTPUTS (Red, 18 pcs)

COMMUNICATION (one red, one yellow, one green)

SUPPLY (One red)

CPU PRINT (One green, one red)

Positioning and identification of these light diodes can be seen from the following drawing.

DIGITAL INPUTS, DI1 to DI12 (Green)

The light diodes are marked from DI1 to DI12 and the attached functions appear from the list of in-puts.

Light in diode = input activated.

DIGITAL OUPUTS, DLR1 to DLR18 (Red)

The light diodes are marked from DLR1 to DLR18 and the attached functions appear from the list of outputs.

Light in diode = output activated.

COMMUNICATION DL12 (red), DL14 (yellow), DL13 (green)

In case UNISAB II communicates with other units, the flashing of the diodes must be irregular.

The red diode indicates that UNISAB II is trans-mitting information whereas the green diode indi-cates that information is being received.

SUPPLY, RST1 (red)

This diode will flash briefly while voltage is con-nected to UNISAB II. During normal operation the light is off.

In case the diode flashes repeatedly when voltage is connected, there may be an error in the voltage supply.

CPU PRINT, ACT1 (green), RST1 (red)

The green light diode must flash irregularly when-ever UNISAB II is electrified. A constant light or no light is a sign of malfunction.

The red light diode must usually be off. It is only on for brief moments in case the CPU tries to re-start the program. This may only happen while UNISAB II is switched on.

9. Trouble shooting

147/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_434

_en_

2.02

.fm

Fig. 9.1 Printed circuit board with light diodes

RED

YELLOWGREEN

Communication

Transmitter

Receiver

GREEN

ACT1

RED

RST1

EPROM

CPU PRINTDIGITALOUTPUTS

TERMINALS

RE1

RE2

RE3

RE4

RE5

RE6

RE1

RE8

RE7

RE9

RE10

RE11

RE12

RE14

RE13

RE15

RE16

RE18

RE17

DI2

DI1

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

DI8

DI7

DI9

DI10

DI12

DI11

RED

RST1

230 VAC 115 VAC 24 VAC

K22 1) Screw compressor

2) Reciprocating compressor

Bat

tery

1) Capacity slide down2) Capacity stage

1) Capacity slide up2) Capacity stage 2

1) Volume slide down2) Capacity stage 3

1) Volume slide up2) Capacity stage 4

1) Economizer suction line2) Capacity stage 5

1) Economizer liquid line2) Capacity stage 6

1) HLI/BLI cooling2) Capacity stage 7/intermed. press. injection

1) Oil cooling2) Oil cooling/thermo pump

1) Oil distribution pipe2) Oil return

1) Oil rectifier2) Water cooling

1) Heating element2) Heating element

Alarm

Warning

AUX. output

Starting request

Compressor start

1) Oil pump start2) Oil rectifier

1) Full flow pump

Compressor operation

EXT. start, normal stop

EXT. start, immediate stop

Starting request (PMS)

Regulator Sp1/Sp2

Motor currentSp1/Sp2

1) Oil pump operation2) Oil return interm.press1) Full flow pump operation2) Oil return high pressure1) Oil flow switch2) Not usedCapacity down blocked

Thermistor (no light function)

Not used

DIGITALINPUTS

9. Trouble shooting

148/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

10. Trouble shooting diagrams

149/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_435

_en.

fm

10. Trouble shooting diagramsFig. 10.1 Error diagram no 1

Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in MANUAL operating mode

Is there light in yellow C

on front?

MANUALoperation

Select picture COMPRESSOR CTRL-MODE and adjust to MANUAL

Display=

READY

Check that input EXT. START IMMED. STOP termi-nals 45-46 is closed. Light in green diode no. 3 on print. Can also be cheked in picture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no 3=1.

Display=

READY

PrelubricationContact YORK Ref.

No

Yes

No

Yes

21

ScrewRecipr./screw

No

No

Yes

Yes


150/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 10.2 Error diagram no 2

Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in MANUAL mode, continued

Check that input STARTING REQUEST FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 is closed. Light in green diode no 4 on print. Can also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no 4 = 1.

Press A to start compressor. Green light diode on front flashes

Check emerg. stop and TÜV pres-sure control, if any. There must be connection between terminals 125-126 and 127-128.

Does compres-sor start?

PMS error mes-sage re-ceived

Input closed? Try again

Apply jumper, or check connec-tions from terminals 116-117 to power management system.

Is relay no 16 activated on

print when try-ing to start (red

light diode)?

Contact YORK Ref.

Check connection from terminals 118-119 to motor starter

ConnectionOK?

Correct wiring connection

Is there feed-back on termi-

nals 41-42 from motor guard? Green light di-ode no 1 on

print.

Check pre-fuses and control volt-age of motor guard.

1

OK

Correct wiring connect.

3

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No


151/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_435

_en.

fm


Start of screw compressor/prelubrication in MANUAL mode, continued

Press A to start compressor. Green light diode flashes on front.

Check that input STARTING REQUEST FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 are closed. Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no. 4=1.

Check that CONFIG I PRELUBRIFICATION = YES.

Oil pump starts?

Error mes-sage in oil system? PMS

error mes-sage re-ceived?

Try againInput closed?

Apply jumper, or check con-nections from terminals 116-117 to power management system.

Relay no 17 is activated

on print. Red light diode

Check wiring connec-tion to oil float. When float has been activat-ed, green light diode no 9 will flash on print.

Connection OK?


Check float function

Connection OK?


Check connection from terminals 120-121 to pump motor starter

Check if feedback is recieved on termi-nals 53-54 (green light diode no 7 on print) from pump motor guard

Connection OK?


Check pre-fuses and control voltage of pump motor guard.

2

No

Yes

No

Yes

3No

Yes

Yes No

No

Yes

YesNo

No

Yes

Yes

No


152/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03


Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode

Select regulating form in picture CONFIG I CONTROL ON

Set Set point, neutral zone and P. Band for chosen regulator

Select picture CTRL MODE and set to AUTO

With C it is possible to change between MANUAL and AUTO by one single pressure. Adjust to MANUAL (= light in yellow diode)

In CONFIG check that AUTO START = YES and AUTO STOP = YES

Check setting of START DELAY in picture TIMER SETUP

Check that input EXT. START IMMED. STOP terminals 45-46 is closed. Light in green diode no 3 on print. Can also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no 3=1.

Display READY?

Prepare for AUTOMATIC opera-tion

Display READY?

No

Yes

4 5

Yes

No


153/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_435

_en.

fm


Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode, continued

Check that input EXT. START, NORM. STOP terminals 43-44 is closed. Light in green diode no 2 print. Can also be checked in pic-ture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL IN-PUT no 2=1.

Display = READY?

Contact YORK Ref.

Press C so that light in diode goes out = AUTO

Compressor can now begin start-up phase depending on setting of regu-lator. REMEMBER that start is de-layed by timer START DELAY.

Is cool-ing/heat-ing re-quired?

Change set point or wait for cool-ing/heating requirement.

Prelubrication

4 5

Yes

No

No

Yes

7 6

ScrewRecipr./screw

No Yes


154/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03


Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode, continued

At compressor start-up green light diode on front will flash.

Does com-pressor start?

Check emerg. stop and TÜV pres-sure control, if any. There must be connection between terminals 125-126 and 127-128.

PMSerror

messagereceived?

Check that input STARTING RE-QUEST FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 is closed. Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can also be checked in pic-ture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no 4=1. Is relay no 16

activated on print when try-ing to start (red

light diode)

ContactYORK Ref.

Try againInput

closed?

Apply jumper, or check con-nections from terminals 116-117 to power manage-ment system.

Check connection from terminals 118-119 to motor starter

ConnectionOK?

Correct wiring con-nection

Check pre-fuses and control fuses of motor guard.

Is there feedback on terminals 41-42 from motor guard? Green light diode

no 1 on print.

Correct wiring con-nection

7

NoYes

Yes

OK

No

No

No Yes

NoYes

Yes

No

Yes


155/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_435

_en.

fm


Yes

NoYes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes7

Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Start of screw compressor/prelubrication in AUTO mode, continued

6

YesNo

Check that input STARTING REQUEST FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 are closed. Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no. 4=1.

Oil pump starts?

Error mes-sage in oil system? PMS

error mes-sage

received?

Inputclosed

Try again

Apply jumper, or check connec-tions from terminal 116-117 to power management system.Check wiring connec-

tion to oil float. When float has been activat-ed, green light diode no 9 will flash on print. Relay no

17 is acti-vated on print. Red light diode.

Check that CONFIG I PRELUBRICATION = YES

Connec-tion OK?

Correct wiring connect. Check connection from terminals 120-121 to

the pump motor starter.

Check float function ConnectionOK?


Check if feedback is received on terminals 53-54 on green light diode no 7 on print from motor guard.

Check pre-fuses and control fuses of motor guard.

ConnectionOK?


At compressor start green light diode on front will flash.


156/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03


= 115 VAC

= 230 VAC

General trouble shooting, UNISAB II

=24 VAC

No light/text in display

Is diode on CPU print

ACT1 flashing green

No Is there light in any diodes on

relay card

Yes

Check connection to display. If necessary, pull out white plug and refit.

DisplayOK?

ContactYORK Ref.

Problemsolved

8

Check supply on termi-nals L and N

Isvoltagecorrect?

Check that white code plug has been fitted.

Isplug

correct?

Fit correct plug

Display reads COPY EEROM after power cut

Probably defective bat-tery

Replace battery. See section, Service, Bat-tery

9

10Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

No


157/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_435

_en.

fm


10

9

8CPU print may have to be re-placed

Check voltage supply of any loose connections, burnt fuses or the like

Check voltage on terminals 141-142 = 24 VAC

Transformer thermally activated. May have to be replaced.

Is this OK

Check fuse in black re-tainer.

Replace fuse.Max 3 Amp.

Is this OK?

Correct errorAre terminals

29-32-37 short-circuited to

frame?

Correct error

Are there any er-rors in external components to

term. 29-30; 32-33; 37-38

Correct error or replace component

Contact YORK Ref.

Are terminals 29-30-33 or 37-

38 short-circuited?


158/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

11. Service

159/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_436

_en_

2.02

.fm

11. ServiceIn case some of the main parts of UNISAB II are defective, it is possible to replace them.

It is recommended to contact YORK Refrigeration before changing any of these parts.

The main parts comprise:

a. Door in which display and keyboard are fit-ted.

b. Relay print with wiring connections.

c. CPU print fitted on relay print.

d. Transformer.

The parts are shown below (see Fig. 11.1).

Fig. 11.1

All replacements must be carried out with UNISAB II in a state of no voltage. Remember that outside control voltage may be connected.

Disconnect the main supply to the motor to avoid risk of indadvertent start-up.

Replacement of doorRemove the blue and white plugs leading to the relay print (the two securing lugs must be bent a little backwards). Remove the two fuse straps as well as the earth connections.

Mount the new door in reverse order as opposed to the dismounting process.

Connect supply voltage.

Replacement of CPU printDismantle the door completely to provide free ac-cess to the printed circuit board.

Remove the screws with which the print is se-cured. Get hold of the bottom of the print and pull it out carefully. It may be fixed rather firmly as it is positioned in two plugs with connection to the re-lay print. It is important to pull at the side of the print in which the plugs are positioned to avoid pulling it out askew, thus damaging the print.

Move both EPROMS and EEPROM from the old CPU print to the new one.

Important!See also Replacement of EPROMS.

PAL

Terminals

EPROM U18CPU print

Battery

Digital outputs

Digital inputs

Fuse

Trans-former

EPROM U17

EEPROM

Empty socket!

Cooling plate

Display connectionKeyboard connection

NEVER use this socket together with sockets pos. U17and U18

U17

U18

11. Service

160/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Mount a new CPU print and door in reverse order as opposed to the dismounting process.

When the above has been completed and the control is switched on, the following picture will ap-pear shortly in the display:

Press the H key. UNISAB II will now be reconfig-ured and the contents of the EEPROM, corre-sponding to the compressor setup, will now be copied into the CPU storeage.

Important! It is possible to answer NO by means of the password. In this case the contents of the EEPROM and RAM store will be deleted, and UNISAB II must be reconfigured. See description under Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM.

The setting is now the same as before the CPU print was changed except for the calibration of the pressure transducers, possibly the brine tem-perature as well as the hour counter, which is now zero. The language is now English. Select anoth-er language if this is required. Enter the values from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is supplied with the compressor. Remember to set time and date.

Replacement of CPU print and EEPROMIf - as an exception - it proves necessary to insert a new EEPROM in connection with the replace-ment of a CPU print, the following procedure must be observed.

Important!See also Replacement of EPROM.

Mount the new parts and switch on the control. The following picture will appears in the display:

Enter the compressor serial no and press the H key. All three light diodes on the front will flash shortly, and the display will show the picture CON-FIG.

It is also necessary to enter the original setup, all alarm and warning limits as well as set points, which must be different from the factory setting. Remember also to calibrate the pressure trans-ducers.

These values are included in the Starting-up Man-ual. Remember to set time and date. The lan-guage is now English. Select another language if this is required.

Replacement of relay printDismantle the door completely to provide free ac-cess to the printed circuit board.

All connected wires on the relay print must be dis-mounted, but first they must be marked so that correct remounting is possible.

Remove the screws that hold the print and tilt the print out of the plastic holders at the terminal row on the long side of the print.

Pull the print off the guide opposite the terminal row and out of the cabinet.

Move the CPU print with the EPROM and Serial EPROM onto the new relay print.

Mount the new relay print in reverse order as op-posed to the dismounting procedure and connect the marked wires in the correct order.


COPY EEPROM YES

SERIAL NO 0

11. Service

161/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_436

_en_

2.02

.fm



The settting is now the same as before the CPU print was changed except for the calibration of the pressure transducers, possibly the brine tem-perature as well as the hour counter, which is now zero. The language is now English. Select anoth-er language if this is required. Enter the values from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is supplied with the compressor. Remember to set time and date.

Replacement of EPROM (program) UNISAB IIThe EPROMs are programmable modules, mounted in sockets in the microelectronic part of UNISAB II. Please note that there are two EPROMs, numbered 0 and 1, identified by white

labels. If replacement is necessary, always re-place both EPROMs as they belong together.

When replacing the EPROM or moving it from one UNISAB II unit to another, do as follows:

• Note the value of the hour counter as well as the calibration values for pressure transduc-ers and brine temperature.

• Switch off the power supply to UNISAB II.

• Switch off the compressor motor starter and observe all safety measures in accordance with the instruction manual, local rules and regulations.

• Place the door in service position as de-scribed in Operating UNISAB II

• The EPROM modules are positioned in the center of the printed circuit board (see Fig. 11.1).

• Each EPROM module is loosened from its socket by an authorized EPROM puller. Take care not to damage the pins on the EPROM module.

COPY EEPROM YES

EPROM and electronics in general can be damaged by static electricity. Therefore, make sure that static electricity is discharged without current passing through the electronics, ie touch the part on which the EPROM is posi-tioned both before and while picking up the EPROM. Touch also the box of the device in which EPROM is to be positioned both before and while fitting the EPROM. It is of course necessary to use the same hand that holds (or is going to hold) the EPROM.

11. Service

162/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 11.2

Mount the EPROMs manually while paying atten-tion to the following:

• Make sure to position the EPROM labeled 0in the upper socket, and the EPROM la-beled 1 in the lower socket.

• Position the EPROM so that the notch in the module is turning right (see Fig. 11.2).

• Take care that all pins are fitted in the socket and carry out the mounting with great care.

• Refit the door.




The settting is now the same as before the EPROM was changed except for the calibration of the pressure transducers, possibly the brine temperature as well as the hour counter, which is now zero. The language is now English. Select another language if this is required. Enter the val-

ues from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is supplied with the compressor. Remem-ber to set time and date.

When changing the EPROM in connection with an upgrade to an updated program version, it is rec-ommended to carry out a FACTORY RESET.

Before a FACTORY RESET is carried out, write down all the UNISAB II settings in the table UNISAB II settings, especially the parameters which are changed back to factory setting by a factory reset. This applies to the following param-eters:

– Alarm and warning limits, set points, PID parameters

– Timers, P band factors

– Capacity limits

See the table UNISAB II settings for a complete review.

See section Operating UNISAB II control, Factory settings for information on factory reset.

Once FACTORY RESET has been completed, enter all the settings which are included in the ta-ble UNISAB II settings, and which differ from the UNISAB II factory values.

Replacement of serial EEPROM (diagnosis)This EEPROM includes information on:

e. Compressor serial no.

f. Date of initial start-up.

g. Compressor configuration.

h. Total number of alarm and warning limits and all other setting values.

i. Status of up to 30 old alarms.

j. Total number of alarms.

COPY EEPROM YES

Notch

EPROM

11. Service

163/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_436

_en_

2.02

.fm

The EEPROM (positioned in a socket) can be re-moved from UNISAB II in compliance with the same precautions as described under Replace-ment of EPROM.

The EEPROM must usually remain in the control as the control cannot function without the EEP-ROM. However, in case the contents of the EEP-ROM is to be examined by YORK Refrigeration, Denmark, it can be removed for inspection. When removing the EEPROM, switch off the control and have an empty EEPROM ready for insertion.

Once the new EEPROM has been fitted, switch on the control again. All information will now be cop-ied into the new EEPROM.

The control is now ready for operation with the same setup as before the EEPROM was re-moved.

Replacement of batteryThe battery is used primarily to ensure that the in-ternal clock runs accurately after a power failure. Moreover, the so-called RAM store is supplied during power failures.

The battery has an expected service life of 10 years and is of the Lithium type. It is not reloaded by the UNISAB II electronic circuit.

If the following picture appears in the display after a power failure, the battery should be replaced:

If a new battery is available, switch off the control and change the battery. Dispose of the old battery in conformity with the environmental rules and regulations in force.

Mount a new battery and switch on the control, and the above picture will appear once more. An-swer YES and press the H key.

The compressor setup is now the same as before the power failure except for the calibration values for the pressure transducers and the brine tem-perature as well as the hour counter, which is now zero. These values are included in the compres-sor Starting-up Manual.

Remember to set time and date as well as lan-guage. The compressor is now operational.

In case no new battery is available, answer YES to the above picture and follow the procedure for replacement of the EEPROM.

Please note that at the next power failure, the problem will be the same.

COPY EEPROM YES

11. Service

164/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Installation of data communication cableTo obtain a correct function of the data communi-cation between several YORK Refrigeration com-puters, the communication cable must be con-nected according to the following instructions.

These instructions only apply to the installation of UNISAB II. For information on connection of PROSAB II/ UNISAB II, see instr.no 0171-745 un-der Supplementary material.

Fig. 11.3

- TX DL12

- RX DL13

63 64 6665

UNISAB II

+ -S2

COMMUNICATIONMODULE

S1

PROSAB IIUNISAB-S/R/RT/RTH

+ - +S2S2

S1S1

PROSAB IIUNISAB-S/R/RT/RTH

-

COMMUNICATIONMODULE

+ -

- TX DL12

- RX DL13

63 64 6665

UNISAB II

63 64

- TX DL12

- RX DL13

UNISAB II

UNISAB II/UNISAB II

636665 64

- TX DL12

- RX DL13

6665

UNISAB II

UNISAB II/PROSAB II

RX DL13 = GREENTX DL12 = REDLED COLOURS

RX DL13 = GREENTX DL12 = REDLED COLOURS

termination block

termination blocktermination block

IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS BETWEEN UNISAB II, RESISTANCE JUMPERS MUST BE CONNECTED IN EACH MODULE

IN CASE OF CONNECTION BETWEEN MORE THAN TWO COMMUNICATION MODULES, JUMPER(S) MUST BE CONNECTED IN BOTH END MODULES

11. Service

165/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_436

_en_

2.02

.fm

Important!The screen of the communication cable MUST be connected correctly in the supplied screwed joints (see Fig. 11.4).

The cable is connected in the terminals shown in Fig. 11.3. The cable must be pulled in parallel from control to control. This applies both to the two conductors and the screen.

In the first and last control the cable must be fin-ished correctly. The resistance of 120 ohm must be fitted as indicated (mounted on delivery). On all other controls the resistance is removed and the terminals are used for passing on the communica-tion cable.

The total length of the cable between the controls must not exceed 1,000 m. Cables of this type are available from YORK Refrigeration.

The cable must have the following data:2-conductor data cable with screeningPair capacity 85 pF/m

Fig. 11.4 shows the connection of the cable screen in screwed joint.

Fig. 11.4

5.

UNISAB II

4.

UNISAB II

3.

1.

2.

11. Service

166/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

GroundingUNISAB II must always be grounded to the com-pressor frame. See drawing no. 2347-002 page AC038_13 under Supplementary material.

In case of a shut down, there can be large electri-cal potential on the compressor motor and thereby on UNISAB II.

The data communication cable screen provides a voltage equalisation between the UNISAB II units. The above mentioned electrical potential may

cause a large current surge through the cable screen. The screen may melt, causing the voltage equalisation to be broken and the communication to be hampered by noise.

To avoid this situation, it is strongly recommended to provide an extra equalising wire in parallel with the communication cable between all the units on the network, as indicated in the drawing no. 2347-002 page AC040_10 under Supplementary material.

12. MULTISAB regulation

167/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_437

_en.

fm


IntroductionMULTISAB is a distributed compressor control system, which can capacity regulate reciprocating and/or screw compressors according to rules, which are set up in detail as described in the fol-lowing, and in a sequence set by the user.

MULTISAB is a distributed software module in-cluded in all UNISAB II, PROSAB II and UNISAB II units on delivery.

MULTISAB connects up to 14 compressors in one and the same communication system.

Fig. 12.1

The MULTISAB system is based on some basic rules:

1. The system is controlled and optimized ac-cording to suction pressure, brine tempera-ture, discharge pressure or external 4-20 mA signal, depending on the chosen type of regulation.

2. The programmed starting sequence is al-ways followed.

3. Screw compressors in operation are run to as high a capacity as possible.

4. It is acceptable that reciprocating compres-sors operate at part load.

MULTISAB is a regulating system for general ap-plication. Should special demands be made as to

the optimization of the compressors, it may be necessary to regulate the compressors externally. The plant itself may also make special demands as to regulating speed and accuracy, which makes a central external regulation necessary.

Such an alternative regulation can be carried out in several ways:

• controlling the digital input External start permission, normal stop

• using the digital output Auxiliary output

• using the 4-20 mA input Auxiliary input

• changing capacity set points from PC/PLC via COMSAB II/PCCOMSAB II.

UNISAB II

1

UNISAB II

2

UNISAB II

3

UNISAB II

14


168/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 12.2

In case compressor capacity is controlled through COMSAB II or PCCOMSAB II from a central com-puter, be aware of the time delay through the com-munication system.

It is possible to make an approximate calculation of this time delay. See COMSAB II instruction no 0171-400.

If UNISAB II is to be connected to controls of the UNISAB S/R or PROSAB II type, see the following instructions if the control units are part of the plant in question:

1) 0171-761 / UNISAB S-Control

2) 0171-772 / UNISAB R-Control

3) 0178-175 / UNISAB RT-Control

4) 0178-181 / UNISAB RTH-Control

5) 0171-729 / PROSAB II

6) 0171-743 / the MULTISAB system for PROSAB/UNISAB II

System setupTo be able to use MULTISAB, a number of points must be completed. Please find the checklist for MULTISAB setup (see the following pages). The points on the checklist can be explained as fol-lows:

A: All units that are to be included in the system must be connected physically.

See section Installation of data communication cable as well as Connecting diagrams to find information on the physical linking of UNISAB II units.

B: All units must be configured for intercommu-nication. See also section Configuration.

In SETUP I CONFIG a compressor number, COMPR. NO, beginning with no 1 and up-wards, corresponding to the number of com-pressors must be entered in each unit.

It is recommended to mark the compressors with this number.

Important!If two compressors have the same com-pressor number entered in UNISAB II, there will be no communication between the units.

In SETUP I CONFIG the communication speed, BAUD RATE, must be entered. In case the system only consists of UNISAB II units, usually choose the highest baud rate. In case the system consists of both UNISAB II and PROSAB II or UNISAB II units, choose 1200 baud. Note that it must be checked that all units on the network are able to run at the selected rate.

C: All units, especially screw compressors, must have a swept volume value entered.

1

UNISAB II

2

UNISAB II

3

UNISAB II

14

UNISAB II

possible modem

PC/PLC

COMSAB II/PCCOMSAB II


169/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_437

_en.

fm

In SETUP I CONFIG enter SWEPT VOLUME, which can be read on the compressor name plate. See section Configuration.

D: An entry must be made in all units whether the system contains a common evaporator and a common condenser.

In SETUP I CONFIG enter the current combina-tion of common evaporator and common condenser in COMMON EVAP/COND. See section Configuration.

E: All units must be have a system no and a starting no.

In SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE enter START NO and a SYSTEM NO. See section MULTISAB.

F: All units in the same system must agree on the way a regulating master (sys. regulator) is chosen.

In SETUP I CONFIG select the same PREF. MASTER in all UNISAB II units, COMPR# or START#. See section Configuration.

If selecting COMPR#, the UNISAB II with the low-est COMPR. NO (point B above) will always be SYS.REGULATOR. The only exceptions are if the UNISAB II is off power or discon-nected from the network. In such case, the UNISAB II with the next COMPR.NO will be SYS.REGULATOR. Note that a defective controlled input sensor does not lead to an automatic change of SYS.REGULATOR in this case.

If selecting START#, the UNISAB II with the low-est START.NO (point F above) will be SYS.REGULATOR for as long as the com-pressor belonging to this UNISAB II unit is running and ready. If the compressor is not available, UNISAB II is not in REMOTE mode, the controlled input sensor (point H below) is defective, or UNISAB II is off pow-

er or disconnected from the network, the UNISAB II unit with the next START.NO will be SYS. REGULATOR.

The SYS.REGULATOR is master of the co-ordi-nated capacity control, which also means that the controlled input sensor (point H be-low) on this particular UNISAB II unit in use. If only one compressor is required, it will usually be the compressor of the SYS.REG-ULATOR which is in operation. However, if COMPR# is selected, it may very well be another compressor.

Guidelines for selecting COMPR# or START#:

• COMPR# is easier and more safe if the con-trolled input is not available to all UNISAB II units.

• COMPR# must be selected if there are any PROSAB II or UNISAB I units on the sys-tem.

• START# is easier and more safe if equaliz-ing running hours is important, especially if all (or all but one) compressors must always be available.

• Always make sure that COMPR.NO is a fixed value, ie never change it to equalize running hours! However, START.NO is meant to be changed from time to time.

G: All units must be adjusted to remote control.

In SETUP I CONTROL COMPRESSOR.CTRL MODE is on REMOTE. See section Com-pressor regulation.

Regulation SetupH: All units must be configured to the desired

regulating method.

In SETUP I CONFIG adjust CONTROL ON to the desired regulating method. See section Configuration.


170/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

The following four regulators are available. The last two have both a cooling and a warming function:

– Suction side (regulation of suction pressure)

– Discharge side (regulation of discharge pressure)

– Brine / hotwater (regulation of brine/water temperatures)

– Ext. cooling / Ext. heating(regulation of a user defined measuring value: temp./pressure/level).

– Note that all units that can become mas-ter must measure the same value to be used for the capacity control. If eg Brine / Hotwater temperature control is select-ed, a separate temperature sensor must be available to all the relevant UNISAB II units. Note that point F above describes how to select the master.

I: All units must (usually) be configured to both automatic start and automatic stop. If this is not the case, the compressor will not start up automatically in case cooling is required or stop automatically when cooling is not re-quired and the temperature becomes too low.

In SETUP I CONFIG, choose:

AUTO START= YES

AUTO STOP= YES

See section Configuration.

J: The chosen regulator must be set in all units.

In the picture for the parameter to be regulated, set the following:

1) Regulator set point, SP1 and possibly SP2

2) Regulator neutral zone, NZ

3) Regulator proportional band, PB

See section Compressor regulation.

Regulation of the entire system will usually take place on the basis of the regulator in the cur-rent regulating master (sys. regulator), ie the compressor with the lowest compressor or starting number.

Therefore it is particularly important that the pa-rameters of the configured regulator has been set correctly.

Always set the same set point on all other units in the same system (ie with the same SYS-TEM NO).

K: All units must have their timers adjusted.

In SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER SETUP the fol-lowing timers are set:

1) START DELAY, time delay before start.

2) STOP DELAY, time delay before stop.

See section Timers, Timer setup.

Both timers can be made to work proportionally (ie depending on the size of Pb).

In SETUP I TIMERS I P BANDFACTOR a proportional factor can be set for each of the timers.

This means that if only a small difference exists between the desired temperature (Sp) and the current one, the timer in the time delays will count very slowly (up to 10 times slower than the time set, depend-ing on the factor set).

If the difference between the desired temperature and the current one is considerable (outside the P Band), the timer in the time delay will count in seconds.

See sectionTimers, P Band factor.


171/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_437

_en.

fm

In case of reciprocating compressors, another two timers must be set.

3) DELAY UP, time delay during loading of stages.

4) DELAY DOWN, time delay during unloading of stages.

Both of these timers can also be made to work proportionally (ie depending on the size of Pb).

In SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND FACTOR a pro-portional factor can be set for each of the timers.

L: In plants with a combination of screw and reciprocating compressors a number of fac-tors may be set to optimize compressor op-eration so that the two types of compressors are used in the best way possible. These factors can only be set on reciprocating compressors and will be effective only in case all reciprocating compressors have lower starting numbers than the screw com-pressors in the same system, and only if TAKE OVER is set to YES in SETUP I CONFIG, See section Configuration.

The optimization is carried out by the Trans-fer function and the Take-over function. It is not economical to run a screw compres-sor at low capacity. The Transfer function attempts to avoid this by reducing the ca-pacity of the reciprocating compressor(s), ie by transferring load to the screw compres-sor. The Take-over function increases the capacity of the reciprocating compressor(s) to make the screw compressor stop, ie by taking over load from the screw compres-sor.

In the section Example of regulation - a combination of screw and reciprocating compressors illustrative examples of the

Transfer and the Take-over situations are included.

As described below, several parameters are available to adjust the Transfer and the Take-over function.

In SETUP ITIMERS I TRANSFER a pro-portional factor FACTOR DOWN (1-10, de-fault 1) can be set for timer DELAY DOWN. It is used when MULTISAB wants to let a re-ciprocating compressor decrease its capac-ity in favour of a screw compressor at low capacity. A larger FACTOR DOWN makes MULTISAB wait longer before reducing the reciprocating compressor capacity another stage.

In SETUP I TIMERS I TRANSFER the size of a transfer zone ZONE can be set, ie the part of the proportional band (0-100%, default 15%) where transfer may take place.

In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER a proportional factor FACTOR UP (1-10, de-fault 1) can be set for timer DELAY UP. It is used when MULTISAB wants to increase the capacity of the reciprocating compres-sor to force the screw compressor down be-low 5% capacity, making it stop. A larger FACTOR UP makes MULTISAB wait longer before increasing the reciprocating com-pressor capacity another stage.

In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER a proportional factor FACTOR START (1-10, default 1) can be set for the START DELAY timer. It is used when MULTISAB wants to start a reciprocating compressor to take over the operation from a screw compressor which is running at low capacity.

In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER the size of a take-over zone ZONE can be set, ie the part of the proportional band (0-100%,


172/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

default 15%) where take-over may take place.

In SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER SETUP the following timers are found.

1) TAKE-OVER DELAY, time delay at take-over, fixed at 300 seconds. When a re-ciprocating compressor has calculated that it is possible to take over a subsequent screw compressor, it will pass into a take-over mode and start TAKE-OVER DE-LAY. If the reciprocating compressor during the entire count down of take-over delay can continue to take over, thus staying in the take-over mode, START DELAY will be ac-

tivated once TAKE-OVER DELAY expires.

2) TAKE-OVER MAX, max duration of a take-over attempt. When TAKE-OVER DE-LAY expires, the time delay TAKE-OVER MAX will also be activated to ensure that a reciprocating compressor will not use more than the TAKE-OVER MAX time during a take-over attempt. If the screw compressor has not stopped before the TAKE-OVER MAX expires, the reciprocating compressor will give up and stop. This delay function can be cancelled by setting the delay for 0 (default).

13. Checklist

173/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_438

_en.

fm

13. Checklist

Checklist for MULTISAB setup

Compressor No

No Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

A Cabling All co-operating UNISAB units must be wired to-gether on common net-work.

B.1 CONFIG→ COMPR NO

Unique ID for each com-pressor on network

B.2 CONFIG → BAUD RATE

Identical for all units on network

C CONFIG → SWEPT VOLUME

Must be entered correctly for each compressor, at least for screws

D CONFIG→ COMMON EVAP/COND

Identical for all compres-sors within system

E.1 MULTISAB STATE → START NO

Unique priority within sys-tem (SYSTEM NO)

E.2 MULTISAB STATE → SYSTEM NO

System ID, identical for all compressors on same controlled input

CONFIG → REFRIGERANT


F CONFIG → PREF. MASTER


G CONTROL → COMPR. CONTROL

Must be REMOTE unless the compressor is exclud-ed (temporarily) from MULTISAB

H.1 CONFIG → CONTROL ON

Identical for all compres-sors within system - see also item C

H.2 Controlled input sencor

The measurement must be available to all com-pressors in the system which can become mas-ter

I.1 CONFIG → AUTO START

Should usually be YES. If not, the compressor must be started manually

I.2 CONFIG → AUTO STOP

Should usually be YES. If not, the compressor must be stopped manually

13. Checklist

174/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

J.1 Set point Identical for all compres-sors within system

J.2 Neutral zone and

P Band

Matching values for all compressors within sys-tem

K.1 TIMER SETUP → START DE-LAY


K.1a

P BAND FAC-TOR → START DELAY


K.2 TIMER SETUP → STOP DE-LAY


K.2a

P BAND FAC-TOR → STOP DELAY


K.3 TIMER SETUP → DELAY UP

Matching values for all re-ciprocating compressors within system

K.3a

P BAND FAC-TOR → DELAY UP


K.4 TIMER SETUP → DELAY DOWN


K.4a

P BAND FAC-TOR → DELAY DOWN


L.1 CONFIG → TAKE OVER

Only recipr. compr. Set for YES if compr. is to take over from screw

L.2 TIMER SETUP → TK OVER MAX

Matching values for all re-ciprocating compressors within system (TK = Take)

L.3 TRANSFER → FACTOR DOWN


L.4 TRANSFER → ZONE


L.5 TAKE-OVER → FACTOR UP



Compressor No


13. Checklist

175/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_438

_en.

fm

L.6 TAKE-OVER → FACTOR START


L.7 TAKE-OVER → ZONE



Compressor No


13. Checklist

176/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

14. Start and system numbers

177/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm


- pref. master = COMPR#.

SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE shows which unit has been chosen as SYS. REG-ULATOR.

In case of two regulating systems or more, it is the compressor with the lowest number in the individ-ual system that works as system regulator.

The regulating compressor (SYS. REGULATOR) will regulate the other compressors in the system even if the compressor is in MANUAL, AUTO, STOPPED or SHUTDOWN.

Only if the voltage supply or the communication is disconnected, the system will automatically select a new system regulator, which will be the unit with the second lowest number.

A compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB system if it is in either MANUAL, AUTO, STOPPED or SHUTDOWN, or if the digital inputs EXTERNAL START-NORMAL STOP and EX-TERNAL START-IMMEDIATE STOP have not been connected.

Moreover, the compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB system if it is in REMOTE/capacity re-mote control with either a 4-20 mA external signal or communication signal.

The way the system operates can be varied de-pending on whether a reciprocating or a screw compressor comes first in the sequence. Like-wise, the way the system operates can be varied with screw compressors of different sizes, de-

Example A - plants with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = COMPR#.

System no 1 1 1 1 1

Starting no 1 2 3 4 5

Compressor no K1 K2 K3 K4 K5

Example B - plants with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = COMPR#.

System no 1 1 1 1 1



In examples A and B, K1 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system.

Example C - plants with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants) where pref. master = COMPR#.

System no 1 1 2 2 2



In example C, K1 will be system regulator of system no 1, and K3 will be system regulator of system no 2.


178/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

pending on whether a small or large compressor comes first.

If compressors of different sizes are mixed, unfor-tunate part load conditions may occur, depending on the sequence.

Be aware that if a screw compressor has the low-est starting number, it may go down on low capac-ity even at small loads.

In case of mixed systems, it is recommended that all reciprocating compressors in a system is placed one after the other, followed by the screw compressors, or vice versa. The take-over and transfer functions will only be effective in case all of the reciprocating compressors have lower start-ing numbers than the screw compressors in the same system.

Start and system numbers - pref. master = START#

In example A, K1 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system, but only if it is operating or able to start.

If K1 is stopped because of an alarm or if one of the digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL STOP or EXTERNAL START- IMMEDIATE STOP is disconnected - and a cooling requirement still exists, the next compressor in the starting sequence will be the regulator of the entire system provided that it is op-erating or able to start - and that it does start. In the above example K2 will become the regulator.

In example B, K5 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system, but only if it is operating or able to start.

If K5 is stopped - and a cooling requirement still exists, the next compressor in the starting sequence will become the regulator of the entire system provided that it is operating or able to start - and that it does start. In the above example K4 will become the regulator.

Example A - plant with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = START#.

System no 1 1 1 1 1



Example B - plant with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = START#.

System no 1 1 1 1 1



Example C - plant with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants)

System no 1 1 2 2 2


179/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

In example C, K2 will be the system regulator of system no 1, and K4 will be the system regulator of sys-tem no 2 provided that K2 and K4 are operating or able to start.

SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE shows which unit has been chosen as SYS. REG-ULATOR.

In case of two regulating systems or more, it is the compressor with the lowest number in the individ-ual system that works as system regulator.

The regulating compressor (SYS. REGULATOR) will regulate the other compressors in the system, but only if the compressor is in REMOTE/MULTI-SAB and at the same time operating or ready to start.

A compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB system if it is in either MANUAL, AUTO, STOPPED or SHUTDOWN, or if the digital inputs EXTERNAL START-NORMAL STOP and EX-TERNAL START-IMMEDIATE STOP have not been connected.

Moreover, the compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB system if it is in REMOTE/capacity re-mote control with either a 4-20 mA external signal or communication signal.

The way the system operates can be varied de-pending on whether a reciprocating or a screw compressor is comes first in the sequence. Like-wise, the way the system operates can be varied with screw compressors of different sizes, de-pending on whether a small or large compressor comes first.

If compressors of different sizes are mixed, unfor-tunate part load conditions may occur, depending on the sequence.

Be aware that if a screw compressor has the low-est starting number, it may go down on low capac-ity even at small loads.

In case of mixed systems it is recommended that all reciprocating compressors in a system be placed one after the other, followed by the screw compressors, or vice versa. The take-over and transfer functions will only be effective in case all of the reciprocating compressors have lower start-ing numbers than the screw compressors in the same system.

Note:The described example of possible configuration where the pref.master = START# can only be used for plants (systems) which are fitted solely with UNISAB II units. The function cannot be used together with a PROSAB II, UNISAB S or UNISAB R / RT/ RTH. In such cases set pref.master = COMPR# on UNISAB II.

Example of regulation - screw compressors only

The working of MULTISAB will be described on the basis of the below example and with the indi-cated compressors.

Start no 2 1 3 1 2


Example C - plant with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants)

Compressor K1. SAB163 Mk.2 K2. SAB163 Mk.2 K3. SAB202S K4. SAB202S

System no 1 1 1 1

Starting no 1 2 3 4


180/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

The following settings have been made in all units:The digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL STOP and EXTERNAL START - IMMEDIATE STOP have been connected.

ConfigurationCONTROL ON = BRINE

AUTO START = YES

AUTO STOP = YES

COMPR.NO = xx(the compressors are numbered from 1-4)

PREF. MASTER = COMPR#(ie K1 is the system regulator)

COMMON EVAP/COND =Y/Y ((common evaporator and common condenser)

SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx(corresponding to compressor name plate)

BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400 (all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)

Regulating parameters (for BRINE regulator)SP = -2°C

(chosen according to the operating conditions of the plant)

NZ = 1°C

PB = 5°C

TimersSTART DELAY = 60 sec.

STOP DELAY = 45 sec.

During the running-in time, adjustment of the val-ues will be required.

If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor tem-perature variations in relation to the set point. This will result in a frequent regulation of the compres-

sors. By increasing Nz the temperature can vary within a larger area before a temperature regula-tion becomes necessary.

If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to changes in temperature to return to its set point. This usually leads to temperature variations close to the set point, but with frequent loading/unload-ing of compressor capacity.

If Pb is increasedl the plant reaction will be slower, and this can prevent frequent oscillations around the set point.

START DELAY is meant to prevent inadvertent start of a subsequent compressor. In case the compressor runs above 95% capacity and the temperature is above the set point, START DE-LAY will be started on the next compressor in the sequence. Should the temperature reach the set point, ie be within the neutral zone before START DELAY expires, the following compressor will not start.

Should the temperature rise excessively before start of the next compressor, START DELAY must be reduced.

In case of too frequent compressor starts/stops, START DELAY must be increased.

STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If the com-pressor is to run for a longer period, increase STOP DELAY.

The above is a general description of the various setting potentials. The final settings will depend completely on the plant in question.

Loading sequenceCompressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at eg 70 % Runs by itself, K2 Not my turn, K3 and K4 Not my turn are stopped.


181/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

The MULTISAB status, shown in picture SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is marked with --.

At increasing cooling requirements and conse-quent capacity loading, compressor K1 will in-crease capacity until 100% capacity is reached.

The loading speed depends on how far the imme-diate temperature is above the set point that has been entered into the regulator.

If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the immedi-ate temperature is above the set point and the ca-pacity of K1 is above 95%, the time delay (START DELAY) will start up in UNISAB II on compressor K2. The timer will count down from its set point to zero, and compressor K2 will start. (Should the temperature reach the set point, ie be within Nz before START DELAY expires, K2 will not start).

When the above has taken place, screw compres-sor K1 Lead compr. will run slowly down from 100% while K2 will increase its capacity Lag com-

pr.. When the compressors meet, ie when their slide position is the same, they will continue to regulate in parallel (see Fig. 14.1).

How much screw compressor K1 decreases in ca-pacity and how fast in order to meet K2 depends completely on the strength of the "UP" regulating signal.

With screw compressors K1 and K2 at 100% and with a persistent cooling requirement, START DE-LAY will be started on screw compressor K3. After a count-down to zero, K3 will start up. K1 will be kept at 100% Runs at max. capacity and K2 and K3 will regulate in parallel.

With a persistent cooling requirement and with K1, K2 and K3 at 100%, START DELAY will be started on screw compressor K4. The timer will count down to zero, and K4 will start up. K1 and K2 will be kept at 100% Runs at max. capacity and K3 and K4 will regulate in parallel.


182/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Fig. 14.1

When two screw compressors regulate in parallel, it means that they follow each other up and down in capacity and that both units will try to keep the same capacity +/- approx 2%.

If the two compressors that regulate in parallel have equal capacities, the capacity change at any given relocation of the capacity slide will be dou-bled compared to the regulation of a single com-pressor.

MULTISAB compensates for this by reducing (by half) the up and down regulating speed.

Unloading sequenceThree of the four plant compressors are assumed to be in operation, K1 at 100% Runs at max ca-pacity, K2 Lead compr. and K3 Lag compr. both in parallel operation at eg 90%.

At decreasing cooling requirement and a conse-quent capacity unloading, compressors K2 and K3 will decrease their capacity until both are be-low the value called parallel capacity. The parallel capacity is automatically calculated by MULTI-SAB. It depends on the size and types of the in-volved compressors and the operating conditions. The parallel capacity is the limit at which K2 is able to take over for certain. If the two compres-sors are of equal size, the parallel capacity will usually be about 55%.

The percentage of PARALLEL CAPACITY can be read in SETUP I MULTISAB I PARALLEL CONTROL.

K3 will now ramp down towards 0% Stop Ramp Down with a speed of approx 12%/min. When K3 is below 5% May stop the STOP DELAY timer will start up. When STOP DELAY expires, K3 will stop Blocked. K2 will, until K3 stops, ensure reg-

25

100

50

75

25

100

50

75

5

5

%

%

1050 15 20 25 min.

1050 15 20 25 min.

Decreasing capacity

Increasing capacity

Lead=lag

Lead

Lag

Lag

Start

Stop

Lead


183/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

ulation all alone Stop Ramp Up, as K1 remains at 100% Runs at max capacity.

Screw compressor K1 Lead compr. and K2 Lag compr. will join each other in parallel operation.

If a cooling requirements still does not exist, K1 and K2 will decrease their capacity until both are below parallel capacity. K2 will ramp down and stop as soon as the STOP DELAY timer expires.

K1 will now ensure regulation all alone Runs by itself.

Operating sequenceThree of the four plant compressors are assumed to be in operation, K1 at 100% Runs at max. ca-pacity, K2 Lead compr. and K3 Lag compr. both in parallel operation at eg 80%.

The cooling requirement is constant.

Due to an alarm caused by high oil filter differen-tial pressure, K2 stops Blocked. This makes K1 Lead compr. and K3 Lag compr. change to par-allel operation, and K3 will increase its capacity to 100%.

When K1 and K3 are above 95% the time delay (START DELAY) will start in UNISAB IIon compressor K4. The timer will count down from its set point to zero, and compressor K4 will start up.

K4 will regulate upwards and the plant will have the following operating mode: K1 at 100 % Runs at max capacity, K3 Lead compr. and K4 Lag compr. both in parallel operation at approx 65% (the parallel operation percentage is lower now than during the output state as K4 is larger than K2).

The alarm on K2 is confirmed (after the oil filter has been replaced), and although K2 enters the READY status Not my turn, it will not start until a requirement exists, as MULTISAB does not stop K4 to make K2 resume its position in the se-quence.

Example of regulation - reciprocating compressors onlyThe working of MULTISAB will be described on the basis of the below example and with the indi-cated compressors.


ConfigurationCONTROL ON = SUCTION

AUTO START = YES

AUTO STOP = YES

COMPR.NO = xx(The compressorers are numbered from 1-4)


COMMON EVAP/COND = Y/Y(common evaporator and common condenser)

SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx(corresponding to the compressor name plate)

BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400(all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)

Compressor K1. SMC108L K2. SMC108L K3. SMC106S K4. SMC106S

System no 1 1 1 1

Starting no 1 2 3 4


184/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator)

SP = -10°C/R(chosen according to the operating conditions of the plant)

NZ = 3°C

PB = 5°C

TimersSTART DELAY = 60 sec

STOP DELAY = 45 sec

DELAY UP = 30 sec

DELAY DOWN = 20 sec


If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor suc-tion pressure variations in relation to the set point. This will result in frequent regulation of the com-pressors. By increasing Nz the suction pressure can vary within a larger area before a regulation of the compressors becomes necessary.

If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to changes in the suction pressure to return to its set point. This usually leads to temperature variations close to the set point, but frequent loading/unload-ing of compressor capacity.

If Pb is increased, the plant reaction will be slower, and this can prevent frequent oscillations around the set point.

START DELAY is meant to prevent inadvertent start of a subsequent compressor. In case the compressor runs at 100% capacity and the tem-perature is above the set point, START DELAY will be started on the next compressor in the se-

quence. Should the temperature reach the set point, ie be within the neutral zone before START DELAY expires, the next compressor will not start.



STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If a quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If the compressor is to run for a longer period, in-crease STOP DELAY.

If DELAY UP is increased, the reciprocating com-pressor will load capacity stages at a lower speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY UP will result in faster loading.

If DELAY DOWN is increased, the reciprocating compressor will unload capacity stages at a lower speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY DOWN will result in faster unloading.

In many cases it is advantageous if DELAY UP is higher than DELAY DOWN.

The above is a general description of the various setting. The final settings will depend completely on the plant in question.

Loading sequenceCompressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at eg 75 % Runs by itself, K2 Not my turn, K3 and K4 Not my turn have been stopped.

The MULTISAB status, as shown in picture SET-UP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is marked with --.


185/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

Fig. 14.2

At increasing cooling requirement and conse-quent capacity loading, reciprocating compressor K1 will load stages at the DELAY UP time lag until 100% capacity has been reached.

It is possible to make the loading speed depend on how far the actual suction pressure is above the set point by setting the proportional factor DE-LAY UP above 1 in the picture SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND FACTOR. See section Regulating set-up.

If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the immedi-ate suction pressure is higher that the set point, the timer START DELAY is started on compressor K2. The timer will count down from its set point to zero, and K2 will start. (In case the suction pres-sure reaches the neutral zone before START DE-LAY expires, K2 will not start).

With compressor K2 at 100% and still capacity re-quirement, the timer START DELAY starts on compressor K3. It will count down before K3 starts up.

When K3 is at 100% and a cooling requirement still exists, the timer START DELAY will start on K4. When timer has expired, K4 will start.

Unloading sequenceIn an operating situation where the entire plant runs at 100% and with a decreasing cooling re-quirement, unloading will start on compressor K4 first.

K4 will decrease its capacity by unloading stages with the time delay DELAY DOWN between each change of stage until it reaches minimum capaci-ty, ie 33% (SMC 106S). One stage will now be un-

%

%

Increasing requirement for capacity

Compressor 1

Compressor 2

Compressors 1+2

TimeCapacity for1 compressor

Compressors 1+2

Compressor 2 Compressors 1

Time

Capacity for1 compressor

0

25

50

75

100

0

50

100

25

75

Decreasing requirement for capacity


186/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

loaded on compressor K3, which will run at 67%, and the timer STOP DELAY will start on K4, (dur-ing unloading the reciprocating compressors will overlap, Fig. 14.2).

When time delay STOP DELAY expires on K4, K4 will stop.

K3 will now decrease its capacity to minimum, and after K2 has unloaded one stage, K3 will stop on the timer STOP DELAY.

Reciprocating compressor K2 will now start un-loading stages with time delay DELAY DOWN, until it reaches minimum capacity, ie 25%. One stage will be unloaded on compressor K1, and the timer STOP DELAY will start on K2.

The system will continue its unloading in stages until K1 is stopped.

It is also possible that the plant stabilizes at part load, and if the cooling requirement increases, the situation will be the same as described under Loading sequence.

Example of regulation - combination of screw and reciprocating compressorsThe working of MULTISAB will be described on the basis of the below examples A and B and with the indicated compressors.

A:

B:


ConfigurationCONTROL ON = SUCTION

AUTO START = YES

AUTO STOP = YES

COMPR.NO = xx(The compressorers are numbered from 1-5)


COMMON EVAP/COND = Y/Y(common evaporator and common condenser)

SWEPT VOLUME = xxxx(corresponding to the compressor name plate)

BAUD RATE = 9600/19200/38400(all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)

Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator)

SP = -20°C/R(chosen according to the operating conditions of the plant)

NZ = 1°C

Compressor K1. Recip. K2. Recip. K3. Screw K4. Screw K5. Screw

System no 1 1 1 1 1


Compressor K1. Screw K2. Screw K3. Screw K4. Recip. K5.Recip.

System no 1 1 1 1 1



187/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

PB = 5°C

TimersSTART DELAY = 60 sec

STOP DELAY = 45 sec

DELAY UP = 30 sec(only reciprocating compressors)

DELAY DOWN = 20 sec(only reciprocating compressors)


If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor suc-tion pressure variations in relation to the set point. This will result in frequent regulation of the com-pressors. By increasing Nz the suction pressure can vary within a larger area before a regulation of the compressors becomes necessary.

If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to changes in the suction pressure to return to its set point. This usually leads to temperature variations close to the set point, but frequent loading/unload-ing of compressor capacity.

If Pb is increased, the plant reaction will be slower, and this may prevent frequent oscillations around the set point.

The purpose of START DELAY is to try to prevent inadvertent start-up of a subsequent compressor. In case a compressor is at 100% capacity and the suction pressure is still above the neutral zone, START DELAY will be started on the next com-pressor in the sequence. Should the suction pres-sure reach the neutral zone before START DE-LAY expires, the following compressor will not start.



STOP DELAY determines the time the compres-sor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If a quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If the compressor is to run for a longer period, in-crease STOP DELAY.

If DELAY UP is increased, the reciprocating com-pressor will load capacity stages at a lower speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY UP will result in faster loading.

If DELAY DOWN is increased, the reciprocating compressor will unload capacity stages at a lower speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY DOWN will result in faster unloading.

In many cases it is advantageous if DELAY UP is higher than DELAY DOWN.

It is recommended to place all reciprocating com-pressors in a system one after the other followed by the screw compressors, or vice versa.

The take-over and transfer functions described in the following will only be effective if all reciprocat-ing compressors have lower starting numbers than the screw compressors.

The above is a general description of the various settings. The final settings will depend completely on the plant in question.

Loading sequence - sequence ACompressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at eg 50 % Runs by itself, K2 Not my turn, K3, K4 and K5 Not my turn have been stopped.


At increasing cooling requirement and conse-quent capacity loading, reciprocating compressor


188/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

K1 will load stages at the DELAY UP time lag until 100% capacity has been reached.

It is possible to make the loading speed depend on how far the actual suction pressure is above the set point by setting the proportional factor DE-LAY UP above 1 in the picture SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND FACTOR. See section Regulating set-up.

If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the actual suction pressure is higher than the set point, the timer START DELAY will start on compressor K2. The timer will count down from its set point to ze-ro, and reciprocating compressor K2 will start. (In case the suction pressure reaches the neutral zone before START DELAY expires, K2 will not start).

With compressor K2 at 100% and a persistent ca-pacity requirement, the timer START DELAY will start on K3. The timer will count down before K3 starts up.

When K3 is at 100% and a cooling requirement still exists, the timer START DELAY will start on K4. When the timer has expired, K4 will start.

When the above has taken place, screw compres-sor K3 will go down from 100% while K4 will in-crease its capacity. When they meet, ie when their slide positions are the same, they will continue to regulate in parallel (see Fig. 14.1).

Whether screw compressor K3 decreases its ca-pacity and how fast to meet K4 depends com-pletely on the strength of the "UP" regulating sig-nal.

With screw compressors K3 and K4 at 100% and with a persistent cooling requirement, START DE-LAY will be started on screw compressor K5. After a countdown to zero, K5 will start up. K3 will now be kept at 100% Runs at max capacity, and K4 Lead compr. and K5 Lag compr. will regulate in parallel.

State of transferIn case of a minor cooling requirement, it is as-sumed that the plant stabilizes in the following sit-uation: reciprocating compressors K1 and K2 both at 100% and screw compressor K3 in 40% slide position.

Reciprocating compressor K2 will now pass into the "transfer" state, ie it will start decreasing its ca-pacity to force the screw compressor capacity up-wards.

However, this will only take place if the actual suc-tion pressure is within the 'transfer zone', consist-ing of the neutral zone (zone 1) plus the transfer zone (zone 3), which is default 15% of the regula-tor proportional band, (see Fig. 14.3).

When the reciprocating compressor unloads an-other stage, this will happen with a time delay that (in sec) is the setting of DELAY DOWN multiplied by the 'transfer factor' for DELAY DOWN. This factor, 1-10, has been entered to avoid hunting in the plant as far as possible as the regulating sys-tem must have time to react to the rise in the suc-tion pressure when the reciprocating compressor is unloading.

If the suction pressure rises (zone 2), the recipro-cating compressor will stop the down regulation while the screw compressor regulates upwards to get the suction pressure in place.

Once the plant has balanced, the reciprocating compressor will continue the unloading of stages and the screw compressor will readjust.

Provided that requirements stay the same, this process will continue until the screw compressor is above 85% slide posiiton. Above this fixed limit it is assumed that the screw compressor is run-ning fairly economically. Further reduction of the reciprocating compressor capacity would result in a high risk that the screw compressor is no longer able to take over, causing frequent loading and


189/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

unloading of stages or start and stop of the recip-rocating compressor.

The result may be that the reciprocating compre-sor K1 runs at 100%, K2 at 25% and screw com-pressor K3 at 85%.

If the cooling requirement increases, screw com-pressor K3 will be loaded at 100%, whereupon re-ciprocating compressor K2 will be loaded.

Fig. 14.3

State of take-over If the plant stabilizes after a transfer situation with K1 at 100%, K2 stopped, screw compressor K3 at 40% capacity, and K2 able to take over this ca-pacity, K2 will start. However, this will only take place if the actual suction pressure is within the 'take-over zones', consisting of the neutral zone (zone 1) plus the take-over zone (zone 2) which is default 15% of the regulator proportional band, (see Fig. 14.3).

When K2 starts up to take over the screw com-pressor capacity, this will take place with the load-ing time DELAY UP multiplied by the 'take-over' factor for DELAY UP. This factor, 1-10, has been entered to avoid hunting.

When reciprocating compressor K2 is loading stages, the suction pressure will drop, but this is

compensated for by unloading on screw compres-sor K3, until it reaches minimum and stops on STOP DELAY.

Be aware that during reloading periods it may happen that a screw compressor is running at low capacity. Furthermore, reloading will take a cer-tain amount of time, which prevents instability in the plant.

In plants with frequent load changes, it may take longer before the reciprocating compressors take over/transfer capacity.

If the plant is very unstable, the variations may be absorbed exclusively by the screw compressor. Consequently, the screw compressor will in some periods run at low capacity. This can be avoided by removing the starting permission from either

SP

6. outside PB

4. 85% PB

2. 15% PB

3. 15% PB

5. 85% PB

7. outside PB

- regulator output signal (capacity DOWN)

Transfer zone = 1+3

Takeover zone = 1+2

+ regulator output signal (capacity UP)

1. NZ


190/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

the screw compressor or the reciprocating com-pressor.

Reciprocating compressors will only try to take over/transfer capacity from/to screw compressors that come later in the sequence.

Unloading sequence - sequence AIn an operating situation where the entire plant runs at 100% and with a decreasing cooling re-quirement, unloading will start on the screw com-pressors.

As illustrated in Fig. 14.1, K4 and K5 will reduce their capacity in parallel until both are below the value called the parallel capacity. The parallel ca-pacity is automatically calculated by MULTISAB. It depends on the size and types of the involved compressors and the operating conditions. The parallel capacity is the limit at which it is certain that K4 is able to take over. If the two compressors are of equal size, the parallel capacity will usually be approx 55%.

The percentage of PARALLEL CAPACITY can be read in SETUP I MULTISAB I PARALLEL CONTROL.

K5 will now ramp down towards 0% Stop Ramp Down with a speed of approx 12% /min. When K5 is below 5% May stop, the timer STOP DELAY will start. When STOP DELAY expires, K5 will stop Blocked. K4 will, until K5 stops, ensure reg-ulation all alone Stop Ramp Up as K1, K2 and K3 remain at 100% Runs at max capacity.

Next, the screw compressors K3 Lead compr. and K4 Lag compr. will work together until K4 stops.

K3 will now decrease its capacity to a minimum and stops on its time, STOP DELAY.

When this has happened reciprocating compres-sor K2 will start unloading stages with the time de-

lay DELAY DOWN until it is down to minimum ca-pacity. Next, a stage is unloaded on compressor K1, and the STOP DELAY time will start on K2 (ie during unloading the reciprocating compressors will overlap, (see Fig. 14.2).

The system will continue unloading in stages until K1 stops.

The plant may also stabilize at part load, and in case the cooling requirement is increasing, the sit-uation will be the same as described under Load-ing sequence - sequence A.

Loading sequence - sequence BCompressor K1 is assumed to have stopped May start, K2, K3, K4 and K5 Not my turn are stopped.


In case of a cooling requirement, K1 will start. When it has reached 100% capacity, START DE-LAY will start on screw compressor K2. The timer will count down, and K2 will start up. When this has happened, screw compressor K1 will go down from 100%, while the capacity of K2 will go up. When the compressors meet, ie when their slide positions are the same, they will regulate in paral-lel.

When K1 and K2 are in 100%, the time delay START DELAY will start on screw compressor K3. When the timer has expired, K3 will start up and K1 will be kept at 100%.

When this has happened, screw compressor K2 will go down from 100%, while the capacity of K3 will go up. When the compressors meet, ie when their slide positions are the same, they will regu-late in parallel.


191/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

Whether K2 reduces its capacity and at which speed to meet K3 depends completely on the strength of the "UP" regulating signal.

With K2 and K3 at 100% and a persistent cooling requirement, ie the actual suction pressure is higher than the set point, the time delay START DELAY will start on reciprocating compressor K4. The timer will count down to zero and reciprocat-ing compressor K4 will start up. Should the actual suction pressure reach the neutral zone before START DELAY expires, K4 will not start.

K4 will now load and unload stages according to the cooling requirements, while the screw com-pressors K1, K2, K3 are kept at 100% capacity Runs at max capacity.

This will continue until all the compressors are at 100% capacity.

Be aware that with the above sequence screw compressor K1 may start and stabilize at eg 35% capacity corresponding to the actual cooling re-quirement. In this situation a subsequent recipro-cating compressor will not try to take over be-cause it comes later in the sequence.

Unloading sequence - sequence BWith the entire plant running at 100% and a de-creasing cooling requirement, reciprocating com-

pressor K5 Lag compr. will be the first to unload stages with time delay DELAY DOWN until it has reached minimum capacity. Next, one stage is un-loaded on compressor K4, and STOP DELAY will now start on K5 (ie during unloading the recipro-cating compressors will overlap, (see Fig. 14.2)).

When STOP DELAY has expired, compressor K5 will stop, and K4 will now continue the unloading. When K4 has unloaded to minimum capacity, it will start up its STOP DELAY time and when this has expired, K4 will stop.

Screw compressors K2 and K3 are now going to decrease their capacity in parallel operation, until they are below the parallel capacity (usually 55% if they are of equal size). K3 will be run down to minimum capacity and stops on its STOP DELAY time. At the same time K2 will take over.

Screw compressors K1 and K2 will adjust in par-allel to the same slide position and start decreas-ing their capacity in parallel operation until they are below the parallel capacity. K2 will be run down to minimum capacity and stop on its STOP DELAY time. At the same time K1 will take over.

Depending on the capacity requirement, K1 will reduce its capacity and possibly stop completely.


192/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Practical example 1Fig. 14.4

Fig. 14.4 shows that the VMY 347 screw com-pressor has number 1, the two VMY 325 compres-sors have numbers 2 and 3. Further, SMC 12-100 has number 4 and SMC 8-100 number 5. The se-quence starting number is seen after "Start #".

The curve, taken from an existing plant, describes a regulating course over a period of approx 3 hours, divided into intervals from A to K.

In interval "A" compressors 1 and 2 run at part load, until they are both a little below 50% slide position, interval "B". Here, the system decides that K1 can be unloaded and K2 will take over.

K2 will now increase its capacity with a simultane-ous increase in the cooling requirement, which means that K4 will start up and adjust its capacity,

interval "C". In interval "D" the cooling requirement drops, and K2 will unload and stop. The two recip-rocating compressors K4 and K5 will now cover the cooling requirements.

In interval "E" there is a brief increase in the cool-ing requirement. This increase is covered by K2. After some time K2 will stop as the cooling re-quirement has dropped again. However, the plant does not have time to stabilize.

In interval "F" the cooling requirement rises again and K2 will restart and go up to approx 60% slide position. Here, the plant stabilizes at a constant compressor capacity in interval "G".

In the period until interval "H" the reciprocating compressor transfers capacity to the screw com-

0177150_0

0

10080604020

0

10080604020

0

10080604020

0

10080604020

0

10080604020

-1-2-3-4 Immediate Time

A B C D E F G H I K

VMY 325-3 Start # 5

SMC 12-100 Start # 1

SMC 8-100 Start # 2

VMY 325-2 Start # 3

VMY 347-1 Start # 4

%


193/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

pressor as the screw compressor is below 85% slide position. K5 stops completely, and K4 will start transferring capacity. In interval "I" K2 has

risen to 70%. Until interval "K" K4 will unload fur-ther and K2 will now be at 100% capacity.

Practical example 2Fig. 14.5

Fig. 14.5 shows that the VMY 347 screw com-pressor has number 1, the two VMY 325 compres-sors have numbers 2 and 3. Furthermore, SMC 12-100 has number 4 and SMC 8-100 number 5. The sequence starting number is seen after "Start #".

The curve, taken from an existing plant, describes a regulating course over a period of approx. 3 hours, divided into intervals from A to K.

In interval "A" compressors K2 and K4 are running at 100% until interval "B". Here, there is a rise in the cooling requirement, and K5 will start loading.

Until interval "C" these three compressors are run-ning at 100%. A rise in the cooling requirement will make K1 start up. At this point K1 and K2 will start dividing the capacity. This can be seen in interval "D", where K2 has decreased a little, while K1 is on its way up.

In interval "E" K1 and K2 have the same slide po-sition (approx 70%) and they regulate in parallel. In interval "F" K5 may transfer capacity and this may continue with K4 transferring until interval "G", where the screw compressors have reached approx 80%.

020

100

406080

020

100

406080

020

100

406080

020

100

406080

-4 -3

020

100

406080

-1

%

A B C D E F G H I K

-2

SMC 8-100 Start # 2

VMY 347-1 Start # 4

VMY 325-2 Start # 3

SMC 12-100 Start # 1

VMY 325-3 Start # 5

0177150_0

Immediate Time


194/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

In interval "H" K1 and K2 are above 85% and K4 will stay passive until interval "I", where K1 and K2 have regulated down due to decreasing cooling requirement. Once they are below 85%, K4 will transfer its remaining capacity. The screw com-pressors have now taken over the entire load.

Please note that in case the sequence is changed during operation, do not expect any immediate re-action. If the plant is balanced at this particular time, it will continue to operate with the "old" se-quence, until a movement has taken place in the regulation and it has adapted to the new se-quence. The chosen compressor sequence will depend on the operating mode of the plant as well as the size of the compressors compared to each other.

Thus, it can be difficult to achieve an optimum compressor operation in every situation. Howev-er, it is possible to select compressors by using the signal input external start - normal stop as a supplement to the MULTISAB system facilities as described above. By removing the external start - normal start signal the compressors can be re-moved from the sequence. MULTISAB will now load compressors with rising sequence numbers - despite the "holes" in the starting sequence.

Trouble shootingThe plant cannot start1) Are all UNISAB II units set on REMOTE?

2) Have the signals external start - normal stop and external start - immediate stop been ac-tivated? See UNISAB II drawings Digital in-puts.

3) Do the units communicate? - check this by means of the picture SETUP I MULTISAB I ALL COMPRESSORS. Check communi-cation cable.

4) Is the actual suction pressure higher than the set point +1/2 neutral zone?

5) Are any of the limiting functions active?

6) Have AUTO START and AUTO STOP been configured?

7) Has the COLD STORE FUNC. been config-ured?

The plant does not run in sequence1) Do the units communicate? In case of no

communication, each UNISAB II will run with its own regulator. It may be useful to en-ter the picture SETUP I MULTISAB I ALL COMPRESSORS and go through the com-pressor numbers (use J and K ). There will be a question mark (?) in the lower left cor-ner of the display if there is no communica-tion to the UNISAB II with the selected number.

– Check communication cable and connection.

– Do two or more UNISAB II units have the same compressor number (COMPR. NO)? Check the numbers in picture SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICA-TIONS. They must all be unique.

2) Do all units that are supposed to run in se-quence have identical SYSTEM NO, which they must. Check the picture SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE.

3) Check whether all units in the same system agree upon the same SYS.REGULATOR, see picture SETUP I MULTISAB I MUL-TISAB STATE. If this is not the case, do all units agree on how to decide the mas-ter/system regulator? See the PREF.MAS-TER field in SETUP I CONFIG.


195/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_439

_en.

fm

4) If PREF. MASTER = START#, has the same START NO been entered in two or more units? See picture SETUP I MULTI-SAB I MULTISAB STATE. They must all be unique!

5) Is START NO = 0 in one or more UNISAB II units? MULTISAB requires that all START NO are higher than 0 and that not two are identical. Note that though it is not possible to select 0 as START NO., the START NO. may still become 0 for several reasons.


196/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

15. List of Versions

197/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_440

_en.

fm

15. List of VersionsThis instruction manual applies to the UNISAB II version stated on page 1.

As an exception, the manual can be used for an earlier version of the UNISAB II program. In such cases it is necessary to consult the list of versions below to identify the points where the manual cannot be relied upon.

Version no Description

1.01 On the HPO compressor an incorrect scaling of the discharge pressure has been cor-rected. 15 languages have been entered.

1.02 No changes in the user's operation.

1.03 The timers Start Delay and Stop Delay will be working, also when capacity is regulated on the external 4-20 mA analog signal.

The digital output AUX = "ready" is only active when the compressor is able to start, ie the digital input "external start permission - normal stop" must also be active.

1.04 The hour counter counts in single hours and no longer in intervals of 10 hours.

An error in press./temp. conversion for R23 refrigerant at approx -70°C has been cor-rected.

An error in the MULTISAB system resulting in blocking of plants with three or more re-ciprocating compressors in sequence has been corrected. (The compressor starting as no 1 remained at 100% capacity at load reduction, preventing no. 2 from unloading the last stage).

1.05 This version does not exist.

1.06 Refrigerant R508 has changed its name to R410A.A new refrigerant, R407C, has been entered.

Two new screw compressor types have been introduced: SAB 128H Mk3 and SAB 163H Mk3.

Automatic zero position (capacity slide) setting has been introduced for SAB 202 with automatic Vi slide as well as manual zero position setting for other screw compressor types.

1.07 Automatic zero position setting has been introduced for SAB 202 with manual Vi slide.

The regulating speed (max speed) has been increased. The regulation is now faster (longer pulses - particularly at low oil pressure levels) than in previous versions.

TSMC/TCMO compressors had no setpoint 2 (SP2) for discharge pipe temperature for regulating the "intermediate press. injection". This has now been introduced.

1.08 General remarks:

During a sequence running with two or more screw compressors, it could happen that all compressors stayed at low capacity without regulating upwards although a capacity requirement existed. This error has been corrected in MULTISAB.

If the suction pressure ramp limiting function prevents the compressor from increasing its capacity to more than 5%, the timer "delay before stop" will not be activated as was the case previously. The compressor will remain in operation.

The configuration point "COMMON CONDENSER" has been extended to include "common evaporator" and is now called "COMMON EVAP/COND N/N".


198/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Screw compressors:

For screw compressors two warnings have been introduced: "LIMITING SUCTION PRESSURE"and "LIMITING DISCHARGE PRESSURE". These will occur whenever the UNISAB II is in position "READY" but unable to start because the suction or dis-charge pressure is within the neutral zone of the limiter in question.

For VMY compressors, the solenoid valve for "capacity down" opens whenever the compressor is prelubricated.

A limiting function has been introduced for "high suction pressure limitation". The com-pressor capacity is limited, during operation, to an adjustable max. value when the suc-tion pressure is above the high warning limit for the suction pressure.

Reciprocating compressors:

A function controlling the by-pass valve ("cap.stage 1") has now been entered for the TCMO 28 compressor.

The timers "DELAY UP" and "DELAY DOWN" that operate in connection with the load-ing and unloading of capacity stages are now active both during capacity regulation with external "4-20 mA input" signals or if capacity regulation takes place via data com-munication.


In the TIMERS menu picture the TIMER SETUP picture has been displaced so that the picture obtains a position on the part of the timer menu that is immediately visible when you select the menu.

In the CALIB/AUX.OUTPUTpicture the AUX output can now be activated by: RUN-NING and READY-EXT.

At auto alarm reset, e.g. at a low suction pressure, the alarm relay will also be auto reset.

1.09 (cont.) Special warnings: Limiter suction pressure, Limiter discharge pressure, Limiter brine and Limiter hot water can now be read via the Danbuss communication.

Motor currents SP1 and SP2 can now be changed right up to 2500 Amp.

Due to an error in the A/D converter software, we have received reports of a false alarm for "Low brine temp" at "Power up" in some plants. This has now been corrected.

Via the communication it is now possible to read whether UII is in REMOTE/capacity regulating mode. To be read as "Cap.mode".

An HP compressor started up by means of the "HP at two-stages" function + the "Ext. start normal stop" signal, is now not going to stop on the "Stop delay" timer anymore, even though capacity is below 5%.

Screw compressors:

A Multisab error has been rectified which could occur as follows: At suction pressure limitation, both compressors regulated down to 0% and the Lead compressor stopped. Before the Lag compressor stopped, however, the capacity re-quirements change. The Lag compressor then continued to run at 0% without regulat-ing upwards, although capacity was needed. This situation coul be altered by changing the Lead compressor from Remote to Manual after which the regulation worked cor-rectly when switching back again to Remote.



199/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_440

_en.

fm

The position regulator parameters (SP, NZ and PB) are now accessible in a new pa-rameter picture for MOTOR/CAPACITY. It is also possible to change NZ and PB via the communication.Further, the neutral zone (+/-1%) at capacity regulation has been removed.

A false alarmfor "capacity error" that might occur (in some special cases), often at 100% capacity and with regulation in the neutral zone, has now been removed.

If a VMY compressor happened to fall out at "Capacity error" during operation, while the slide was above 5%, the slide was not run down when the alarm was confirmed, because the oil pump did not start. This has now been corrected.

The VMY compressor would stop the slide run down (the oil pump was stopped) when-ever the capacity was below 5%. An extended hysterisis has now been introduced so that the oil pump does not stop until 10 sec. have passed and capacity is below 4.5%.

1.09 (cont.) Reciprocating compressors:

The MULTISAB transfer- and take-over mode for linking of reciprocating and screw compressors has now been implemented with the same functionality as that of Unis-ab-RT.

The texts in the TIMERS, TRANSFER and TAKE-OVER pictures have been changed.

The new E-type for SMC/TSMC compressors has been introduced in CONFIG.

HPO/HPC. The setpoint for the suction pressure regulator can now be set to 25 Bar - the discharge pressure regulator right up to 40 Bar. The warning limit for High Differ-ential Pressure is 25 Bar.

1.10 Please note that this program version no. 1.10 is tied up with instruction manual version 1.10A.

General remarks:

All SMC and TSMC compressors are going to be configured as either type S/L or E.

An HP compressor started with the "HP at two-stage" function + "Ext. start normal" sig-nal, is not going to stop on the "Stop delay" timer if the comperessor has been selected for REMOTE/Multisab and no other compressors are operating in this system. Can only be stopped by opening the input:"Ext. start normal".

The AUX output READY-EXT is now also applicable in AUTO

It is now possible to use a user-configurable refrigerantR000.

It is now possible to use a user-defined password.

UNISAB II can now be reconfigurered to UNISAB / Evolution.

Screw compressors:

The secondary oil pump on VMY compressors was able to make a brief start on "power up". This has been corrected.

Prosab II and UNISAB II did not regulate correctly in LEAD-LAG.This has been corrected.

The minimum limits for low oil pressure has been raised for Mk3 compressors.

The heating rod was not connected at compressor stop if the compressor:1) stopped on alarm within 60 sec after start or2) the alarm "capacity error" appeared at a stop.

This has now been rectified.




200/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

An adjustable time delay has been built in on the oil return.

The time delay for low oil pressure is now also active during operation.

It is now possible to set up a delayed closing of the solenoid valves for oil cooling or water cooling at compressor stop.

A limiting function has beeen introduced for high discharge temperatures.

The limiting function for "high suction pressure limitation" has now also been intro-duced for reciprocating compressors.

The capacity of the reciprocating compressor is stored in DIAGNOSIS I OLD ALARMS in case the alarm should fall out.

1.11 This version does not exist.


COP calculation and display on the UNISAB II is now possible. Select the function in configuration. The calculated COP, the cooling output and the efficiencyare shown in the picture COP.

The position transmitter signal for the capacity slide can be calibrated at 0 % and 100 %.

A test version containing the SAB 330 screw compressor is installed. The programme can only be used for internal YORK test.

It is now possible to select the unit kPa in the UNISAB II.

A larger EEPROM type with a capacity of 4 kByte has been introduced. Up to now the capacity has only been 2 kByte.

Screw compressors:

Screw compressor type SV 80 is now supported.

The UNISAB Evolution II data are now automatically updated in the Evolution menu structure.

An error whereby the heating element was not activated after switching the power on/off has been rectified.

Aconversion error in the display of oil filter difference pressure has now been rectified. The error only occured during PSI conversion.


It is now possible to disconnect the MULTISAB "transfer/take-over" function.

A MULTISAB error which occurred in a certain combination of plants with both screw compressors and reciprocating compressors has now been rectified.


EEPROM, calibration settings and hour counter are saved.

Screw compressors

In version 1.12 the VMY compressors started the prelubrication pumps shortly after power up. This has now been rectified.


When the UNISAB II has been configured so that it is regulated using the brine tem-perature, and this is in the lower P-Band, and a limiting function at the same time is active, the UNISAB II will - when the lowest step has been reached - count down in "delay down" instead of "stop timer". This has now been rectified.



201/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_440

_en.

fm

1.13(990831)

1.13(000224)

2.00

Version 1.13 - which is marked with the date 990831 - differs from the original 1.13 mainly on the following points:

It is found in three varieties: 1.13-A, 1.13-B and 1.13-C. The three varieties contain the same program but in three different sets of languages:-1.13-A: English, Danish, Finnish, Italian, Norwegian and Swedish.

-1.13-B: English, German, French, Hungarian, Dutch and Russian.-1.13-C: English, Czech, Spanish, Greek, Portuguese and Polish.When UNISAB II is switched on for the first time or when a program RESET is performed, the set language is English.

Low oil pressure alarm is delayed extra 10 seconds at compressor start to avoid unin-tended alarm.

A number of alarms and warnings has been added.

The alarm #83 "Vi position" appears if the shown capacity is 100% while the measured capacity position is < 20%.

A number of errors have been corrected compared to earlier versions. Additionally,

it is now possible in the MULTISAB→ PARALLEL CONTR picture to type in an OFF-SET to the parallel capacity;

changes regarding "Evolution" have been carried out.

General remarks:

The following compressor types have been added:

-SAB 128 HR

-SAB 163 HR

-SAB 250 S/L/E

-SAB 330 S/L/E

The following refrigerant type has been added: R744 (CO2).

Communication with Quantum compressor controller now possible.

The AUX OUTPUT can now additionally be configured to "READY AND ME ONLY" which can be used to ensure water circulation at the PT100 sensor even if no com-pressor is running.

The manual has been thoroughly updated.



202/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

2.01

2.01 (020221)

Screw compressors:

The capacity control is now being carried out by standard PID controllers.

Minimum capacity increase/decreace pulse 0.3 sec.

At compressor stop, capacity down signal until capacity < 5%.


A low pass filter has been attached to the suction superheat to avoid low superheat alarm when unloading stages. The timer "Low superheat" is now adjustable 15 - 600 sec.

Further remarks:

Compressor types SAB 283 L/E, SAB 355 L as well as the GSV/RWF series (see con-figuration).

Two new refrigerants: R1270 (Propylene), R 290 (Propane).

One new timer has been introduced for screw compressors:Timer 33 Lubricating pressure.

One new timer for reciprocating and screw compressors have been introduced:Timer 32 Low suction pressure.

Turkish has been added.

Timer for oil filter differential pressure has been raised to 300 seconds.

Screw compressor, type SAB 80. Max values for oil filter differential pressure have been changed to: Alarm = 2.5 bar and warning = 2.2 bar.

Contrast can now be adjusted from any menu picture by means of the RESET button and the arrow up/down keys.

Low alarm and low warning for brine temperature have been changed from -60°C to 100°C.

Screw compressor: Start delay and stop delay factors affecting the countdown of the timer have been changed to start and stop delay “zones” in [%] of the P-band. When regulated value is outside a “zone”, the timer will start. Set value 0-100 [%]. Setting of 0 [%] results in the “zone” passing over to the other side of Nz, ie. a stop delay zone = 0 % means that the stop delay timer will start when regulated value is inside or below Nz.

EEPROM. When switching to the use of two EPROMS at the same time (from version 2.0x) a timing problem occurred which had the effect that writing to and reading from the EEPROM was not always carried out correctly. This has now been rectified.



203/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_440

_en.

fm

2.01 ROTA This version has never been officially released but has primarily been used for rotatune units and as spare part for correction of errors.

General remarks

If the compressor capacity was controlled by a 4-20 mA signal, the compressor would not start even though the signal exceeded 4.8 mA (5% capacity). This has now been rectified.

At the initial start-up of UNISAB II, the start number and system number were set at a fixed value of “0”. This had the effect that the compressor could not start and operate in auto and remote control. This has now been rectified.

Multisab sequence was not optimized to support correct operation between frequency controlled and conventional compressors. This has now been rectified.

The menu lines CAPACITY and VOLUME have been moved from the MOTOR picture in the main menu to a new picture called CAPACITY. This picture is found below the SET UP menu. See menu tree in the beginning of your manual.

There is a new menu line below the MOTOR picture which is called MOTOR FRE-QUENCY. It indicates motor revolutions per minute when the compressor capacity is regulated by a frequency converter.

The COP picture has been moved from the CALIBRATION menu to the CONFIGURA-TION menu.

Configuration. In the measuring unit picture, there is a new menu line, MOTOR INPUT. See the configuration section in your manual for installation.

Screw compressors

When operating in 100% capacity for a longer period of time, sometimes the compres-sor would simply stop for no reason with the alarm for capacity error on. This has now been rectified.

The following compressor type has been added: Gram GST screw compressor with stepless capacity slide control and control of the volume slide in three steps by means of two solenoid valves. Volume ratios: 2.2-3.5-5.

The volume transmitter can now be calibrated by means of software calibration. See the calibration section in your manual.

The “feedback” signal from a frequency converter can now be calibrated by means of software calibration. See the calibration section in your manual.

Configuration. In the measuring unit picture, there is a new menu line, CAP/FREQ. See the configuration section in your manual for installation.

A new timer has been introduced in connection with GST compressors: Timer 34 Vi-pause.


HPO/HPC. High warning is increased from 25.0 bar to 25.2 bar. Thus, the limiter zone is now 25.0-25.2 bar.



204/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

2.02.1 This version replaces all prior versions.

General remarks

4-20 mA initialization error during UNISAB II restart. The display was flashing during reconnection of power supply to UNISAB II. The error first occurred in version 2.01. It has now been rectified.

The ROTA concept has now been extended to include reciprocating compressors with frequency converters and screw compressors controlled by a combination of frequen-cy, capacity slide and volume slide.

The multisab system now handles both frequency controlled screw and reciprocating compressors which operate in sequence with either reciprocating and/or screw com-pressors.

The “copy EEPROM” function, when changing parts in UNISAB II or at low battery volt-age and a simultaneous reconnection of power supply, has now been changed. Thus it is no longer necessary to enter password to reply YES, simply press “arrow left” to restart. See service section in the manual for further details.

UNISAB evolution plant. When simultaneously using the function EVOLUTION and CHILLER = YES in the configuration, the following error might occur: During operation, the green diode on the front cover would start to flash for about one minute and then, for no apparent reason, the compressor would stop. This has now been rectified.

UNISAB evolution plant. When simoltaneously using the function EVOLUTION and CHILLER = YES in the configuration, the following error might occur: In case of a pause before compressor start-up, the compressor would not start. The start delay tim-er kept counting in negative seconds instead of stopping at 0 and starting the compres-sor. This has now been rectified.

Configuration. There are two new menu lines in the picture MOTOR below the CON-FIG menu, namely, MINIMUM frequency and MAXIMUM frequency. See the configu-ration section.

Multisab error in connection with direct capacity control: When disrupting the 4-20 mA remote control signal for several UNISAB II compressors at the same time, not all of the compressors will start when the signal returns. This has now been rectified. The error might also occur in EPROM version 1.13 and earlier.

In the Instruction Manual of version 2.02 and in later manuals, there are charts of “UN-ISAB II Settings” and “UNISAB II diagnosis” in the back of this book. These used to be in the Starting-up Manual.

All new menus and parameters of this version are primarily shown in English only, even if a language other than English has been chosen. However, the following five languages are fully translated: Danish, Swedish, Dutch, French and Italian. The re-maining languages will be updated in later versions as they are being translated.

Screw compressors

When regulating the discharge pressure, the regulator would be out of order and thus capacity could either be 0% or 100% but could not settle at medium capacity. This has now been rectified.

Timer values concerning the prelubrication function for screw compressors was not in-itialized correctly after factory reset - only if followed by a power reset. This has now been rectified.



205/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_440

_en.

fm

Version Description

There was an error in the regulator, which would only occur when a limiter was in passive mode and when, at the same time, more capacity was required. This error caused the ca-pacity to decrease very slowly as long as the limiter was in passive mode. This has now been rectified.

The following compressor type has been added: SAB110SR/LR.

The PID-regulator function has been thoroughly explained in this version of the manual and it contains practical examples of general usage of this function.

Known errors of this version:

General remarks

Multisab. Sequential control of several rotatune compressors in the same system as con-ventional compressors (rotatune master/slave operation) has not yet been implemented. It is expected to be implemented in version 2.02.2.

The following concerns compressors which control frequency on the frequency converter by means of a 4-20 mA output signal from the UNISAB II and only in MANUAL OPERA-TION MODE: In MANUAL MODE, the compressor capacity will be regulated back to the capacity it had before the limiter went into active MODE, as soon as the limiter is no longer in function. Therefore, if capacity is manually regulated up to e.g. 80% and the limiter is activated and forces capacity down to e.g. 30%, capacity will then automatically be regulated back to 80% as soon as the limiter is no longer in function. This regulation takes place without activating the capacity keys.

UNISAB II Evolution: When changing baudrate for port 1 (when using Evolution PLC), a factory reset must be carried out or UNISAB II must be turned off and on. If this is not car-ried out, the new communication speed will not be initialized and communication to the PLC cannot be effected.

Screw compressors

SAB110SR/LR. During operation for a long period of time in remote or auto control, it might be quite some time before capacity is decreased even though the regulator requires less capacity.


Motor frequency control in connection with two-stage reciprocating compressors has not yet been fully implemented.


206/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Version Description

2.02.2 General remarks

Multisab sequence with several rotatune compressors running in the same system is now implemented but has not yet been tested. It is expected to be released in the next version.

UNISAB II evolution; when changing communication speed on port 1 for use with Evolution PLC, the new speed is now initialised automatically.

Superuser password has been changed.

Textual errors have been corrected in the Swedish instruction manual.

When installing eprom version 2.02.2 instead of an earlier version and at the same time maintaining battery voltage on UNISAB II, the contrast now initialises at a value between 20 and 80 when pressing the “R” key. Afterwards, the contrast can be adjusted by simulta-neously activating the “Reset” key and the “arrow up” or “arrow down” key.

Screw compressors

Screw compressor SAB110SR/LR. When operating at 100% capacity for a long period of time in either remote or auto control, the length of period until capacity was reduced was disproportionately long even though the regulator had required less capacity. This has now been rectified.

Due to an error in the outer PID-regulator, a screw compressor about to stop would keep running at minimum capacity because the “delay before stop” timer was reset and started recounting before the compressor stopped. The problem only appeared when e.g. the suc-tion pressure value passed the limit between NZ and the lower P-band. This problem ap-plies to all regulating modes. Furthermore, the compressor would run up capacity a little every time this limit was passed. This has now been rectified.

Known errors

When using the “copy eeprom” function, all timer values are reset at default values.


207/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_440

_en.

fm

Version Description

2.03.1 General remarks

Mode of operation has been changed for timer no. 32 "Low suction pressure". Now the alarm for low suction pressure can be suppressed for up to 60 seconds during both start-up and operation.

Rotatune multisab function; the taking over function has been corrected. Now a master compressor includes subsequent stopped rotatune compressors (slaves) in the taking over calculation when attempting to take over a subsequent screw compressor. Earlier, it only included its own 60% free capacity in the taking over calculation. See Rota appendix.

A false warning for low suction pressure when the compressor is in stopped control mode has been corrected. Before, the warning disappeared when control mode was changed from stopped but it generated false warnings which communicated with the UNISAB net-work either via the Sabcom II driver or the Comsab II module. The warning typically ap-peared when the suction pressure lay between the low alarm default value and the low warning default value.

Rotatune multisab. An error regarding several systems in the same network has been cor-rected. When a rotatune compressor was operating with several systems in the network (e.g. low and high pressure systems) the multisab system would fail. A slave which was starting up would immediately stop after only a few seconds.

Rotatune multisab. When a master compressor was stopped due to an alarm, the slave did not automatically adopt the role of master regulator. This has now been rectified.

Screw compressors

Timer no. 7 "Prelubrication" has been changed for screw compressors of the SABxxxHR type. Prelubrication has been changed from a default value of 10 seconds to 0 seconds. The compressor will still be prelubricated but the compressor motor must start up immedi-ately when the signal of the oil flow switch is present.

An error has been corrected in rotatune multisab between two rota screw compressors. When two rotatune compressors were running in parallel, the master ran with a fixed ca-pacity of e.g. 60% and the slave hunted up and down with a variation of 5-10% around the the master’s 60%=50-70% when it should be running with the same capacity as the master. To compensate for this, the default values for the internal regulator on the UNISAB II on the slave compressor must be changed. P-band should be changed from 200 to 400%, T.int. from 30 to 90 seconds and minimum pulse should be changed to 0.3 seconds.


Reciprocating compressor Mk4. A new timer no. 11 is introduced, "Filter diff. High". On Mk4 reciprocating compressors, the oil filter differential pressure is monitored by an electrical switch. Digital input 9 is usually open. If the differential pressure exceeds the set value, the switch gives an input signal. If this signal is active for more than 300 seconds, the warning "high oil differential pressure" is given. There is no operating limiting function in this warn-ing. See wiring diagrams for installation of this switch.

The auxiliary output function has been corrected. When using the auxiliary output function for maximum and minimum capacity respectively, this did not function correctly for rotatune machines in earlier eprom versions.

Rotatune reciprocating compressors. An error has been corrected in the outer regulator. The neutral zone value was doubled so that it applied both above and below the set point. Now, the neutral zone is divided in equal parts above and below the set point. See also the section about regulation in this manual.


208/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

Version Description

Known errors

When using the "copy eeprom" function, all timer values are reset at default values.

When using the 4-20 mA analog output function from UNISAB II to a frequency converter to control the speed of the compressor motor the following problem is found:When running in auto or remote control mode, it is still possible to change the speed of the compressor motor with the operating keys capacity up or capacity down. This should only be possible in manual control mode.

16. Spare parts for UNISAB II

209/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_441

_en.

fm


Notes:1) Not used for HPO/HPC compressors2) Only used forHPO/HPC compressors3) Units supplied before November 19954) Units supplied after 1 November 19955) Units supplied after 1 January 19976) Only for SAB 110, SAB 128H (not HR),

SAB 163B, SAB 163H (not HR) and SAB 202 compressors.7) Only for SAB 250 and SAB 330 compres-sors.8) Only for SAB 80 compressors.9) Only for SV 10/20 compressors (not Ro-tatune)

Item Part number

Normal spare parts set 3084-394

Set of accessories - UNISAB II 1572-018

EPROM tongs 1613-002

EEPROM tongs 1613-003

EEPROM (2kB-serial) - To be used in version Eprom 1.10 and earlier versions. 1571-015

EEPROM (4kB-serial) - To be used in version Eprom 1.12 and later versions. 1571-018

Certificate set 3084-383

Normal spare parts set 3084-394

Front cover with sheet and display, YORK Refrigeration logo 1573-008

Front cover with sheet and display, Sabroe logo 1573-007

CPU print (rev. C) 1572-026

Relay print (rev. G) 1574-016

Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS32R-1-9 bar 1) 1373-249

Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS2050-1-25 bar 1373-271

Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS32R-1-59 bar 2) 1373-251

Pt100 sensor 4-conductor (1/2" thread) 3) 1373-245



Position transmitter 6) 3448-004

Position transmitter 7) 3448-___




210/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

17. Supplementary Material

211/2220178-445 - ENG

Rev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

_442

_en.

fm

17. Supplementary Material"Quick Reference"LeafletInstalling a data communications cable0171-745

Data sheet for AKS 32R -(-1/+9 bar)0178-410

Data sheet for AKS 2050 - (-1/+25 bar)0178-414

Data sheet for Pt100 sensor - Temp./resistance table0178-411

Capacity and Vi pos. transmitters0178-412

Electrical Wiring Diagrams for:

• Mounting of ground log and emergency stop (page AC038_13)2347-002

• Voltage equalization (page AC040_10)2347-002

• Screw compressors(page 1-4, 10-14, 16-22, 25-32, 35-36, 39-40)3448-235

• Reciprocating compressors (page 1-40)3448-236

17. Supplementary Material

212/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

UNISAB II 2.03

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

-445

IX.fm

213/2220178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

Index

A Additional unloadreciprocating compr. ........................................................................................39

Adjusting slide velocity ..........................................................................................97Alarm

alarm from Chiller .............................................................................................57auxiliary input signal .........................................................................................55capacity ..........................................................................................................103capacity error

screw compr. .............................................................................................. 55Cooling fan error .............................................................................................. 56Error in diagnosis- EEPROM ...........................................................................57Evolution

no communication to PLC ..........................................................................58full flow pump error

screw compr. .............................................................................................. 56high motor temperature .................................................................................... 56identification numbers Alarms-warnings ..........................................................59Limiting brine temperature ...............................................................................57Limiting discharge pressure .............................................................................57Limiting discharge temperature ........................................................................57Limiting hot water .............................................................................................57Limiting suction pressure .................................................................................57low lubricating pressure monitoring .................................................................58motor error .......................................................................................................55motor overload ...........................................................................................55, 56no communication to Chiller .............................................................................57no starting permission ......................................................................................55oil pump error

SAB 80 .......................................................................................................56screw compr. .............................................................................................. 56

oil rectifier error ................................................................................................57oil system error

screw compr. .............................................................................................. 55overload discharge pressure ............................................................................56suction gas superheat ......................................................................................54Vi-position error ................................................................................................57Wrong starting number in sequence ................................................................57

Analog inputsnumbering ......................................................................................................145

AutoStart .................................................................................................................34stop ..................................................................................................................34

UNISAB II 2.03

214/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

Automatic setting of a new zero point(SAB 202) ........................................................................................................99

Aux.output .............................................................................................................119

B Baud rateport 1 ................................................................................................................41port 2 ................................................................................................................42selecting ...........................................................................................................39

Boostermenu description ..............................................................................................35

Brinetemperature ......................................................................................................33

Brine temperatureCalibration ......................................................................................................126

C Cabinetopen the cabinet ..............................................................................................13

Calculated Vi position ..........................................................................................102Calibration ...........................................................................................................125Capacity

corrected capacity ............................................................................................98Capacity measuring system

Long-Stroke Capacity-RodCalibration ................................................................................................130

Turning TransmitterCalibration ................................................................................................128

Change to full load ...............................................................................................102Change to part load .............................................................................................102Checklist ..............................................................................................................173Chiller

menu description ..............................................................................................41Circuit board with light diodes ..............................................................................147Clima control

menu description ..............................................................................................39Climate control

description ........................................................................................................95code plug ...............................................................................................................12Cold store

funktion ..........................................................................................................120menu description ..............................................................................................39

Compressoradjusting slide velocity .....................................................................................97slide data ............................................................................................. 42, 43, 44

Configurationmenus ..............................................................................................................27

Control and surveillance ......................................................................................111

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

-445

IX.fm

215/2220178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

Aux. output .....................................................................................................119Capacity down blocked .................................................................................. 120Cold store function .........................................................................................120COP setting ....................................................................................................119External start permission- immediate stop .....................................................117External start permission- normal stop ..........................................................118FV 19 with oil pump .......................................................................................115FV 24/26 with oil pump .................................................................................. 114GSV/RWF with oil pump ................................................................................113Motor current measuring ................................................................................118motor power measuring .................................................................................119Power management system ..........................................................................120Reciprocating compressors ...........................................................................117SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2 without oil pump .......................................................116SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pump ......................................................116SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump ..........................................................................117SAB 202/ 163 & 128H MK3 with oil pump .....................................................111SAB 283/ 330 and 355 with oil pump .............................................................112SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump ......................................................113SAB128/163 HR with oil pump ....................................................................... 111Thermistor connection ...................................................................................119VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump ........................................................116VMY Mk 3 without full flow pump ...................................................................116VMY Mk3 with full flow pump .........................................................................111

Control mode ......................................................................................................... 79COP

active ................................................................................................................40Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 142setting ............................................................................................................119

D Danbussmenu description .............................................................................................. 41

Data communication cableinstalling the data communication cable ........................................................164

Define refrigerant R000 .......................................................................................122Diagnosis

Analog inputs .................................................................................................140COP ...............................................................................................................142Digital inputs ..................................................................................................140Digital outputs ................................................................................................140Examine memory ...........................................................................................141Insp. old alarms ..............................................................................................137Misc. functions ...............................................................................................139New password ...............................................................................................141No. of alarms ..................................................................................................141pictures ..........................................................................................................137serial number .................................................................................................141Software version ............................................................................................ 139

UNISAB II 2.03

216/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

Zero capacity pos. ..........................................................................................142Digital inputs

Diagnosis .......................................................................................................140Digital inputs and outputs

Numbering .....................................................................................................143Digital outputs

Diagnosis .......................................................................................................140Discharge pressure

menu description ..............................................................................................33overload ...........................................................................................................56

Displaycontrast ............................................................................................................25description ........................................................................................................13in Bar or °C/R ...................................................................................................20

Display indicationsvarious limiters ...............................................................................................109

E Economizerhigh suction pressure .......................................................................................35low capacity .....................................................................................................35menu description ..............................................................................................35

Electrical slide controlSAB 250 and SAB 330 ...................................................................................101

Evolutionno communication to PLC ................................................................................58warning from PLC ............................................................................................58

Examine memoryDiagnosis .......................................................................................................141

EXT.COOLmenu description ..............................................................................................34

EXT.HEATmenu description ..............................................................................................34

External inputuniversal regulators ..........................................................................................91

F Factory settingrestore setting ..................................................................................................41

Factory settingsreturn to ... ........................................................................................................25

Flow factormenu description ..............................................................................................41

Front panelcontrol/recording section ..................................................................................14green lamp .......................................................................................................14Red lamp ..........................................................................................................14Yellow lamp ......................................................................................................14

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

-445

IX.fm

217/2220178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

Functionchanging a function ..........................................................................................24

G Green .....................................................................................................................14Grounding ............................................................................................................166

H High difference pressure Limiter ..........................................................................107HP

on two stage .....................................................................................................36HP on TWO-STAGE ............................................................................................ 121Hydraulic slide systems

Calibration ......................................................................................................127

I Input signalAuxiliary input signal

screw compressors .................................................................................... 49auxiliary input signal

HPO-HPC ...................................................................................................52recip.compr. ................................................................................................51

L Languageslist of languages ...............................................................................................26

Limiting functionsStandard limiters ............................................................................................ 105

Liquid subcoolmenu description .............................................................................................. 41

List of Versions ....................................................................................................197Loading sequence ...............................................................................................180Long-Stroke Capacity-Rod

Adjusting ........................................................................................................131

M Manual setting of a new zero point ........................................................................99Manual zero ...........................................................................................................40Mecanical zero ......................................................................................................40Menu Tree

One-stage Reciprocating Compressor .............................................................17Screw Compressor ..........................................................................................16Two-stage reciprocating compressor ...............................................................18

Motoralarm for cooling fan error ................................................................................56alarm for high motor temperature ....................................................................56alarm motor overload .......................................................................................55current

calibration .................................................................................................127

UNISAB II 2.03

218/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

limiter ........................................................................................................106measuring .................................................................................................118range ..........................................................................................................38

motor error alarm .............................................................................................55motor overload alarm .......................................................................................56power measuring ...........................................................................................119signal ................................................................................................................42size ...................................................................................................................41

Multisabcompressor. no. 1 to 14 ...................................................................................35description ........................................................................................................74parallel control ..................................................................................................77preferred master ..............................................................................................35regulating Setup .............................................................................................169regulation .......................................................................................................167special timers

recip.compr. ................................................................................................73state .................................................................................................................75system setup ..................................................................................................168take over ..........................................................................................................41

N New passwordDiagnosis .......................................................................................................141

No. of alarmsDiagnosis .......................................................................................................141

Node noport 1 ................................................................................................................41port 2 ................................................................................................................42

O Oil coolingselecting ...........................................................................................................38setting ..............................................................................................................37

Oil heating ...........................................................................................................122Oil pump

full flowscrew compr. ..............................................................................................34

Oil rectifierselecting ...........................................................................................................40

Oil returnreciprocating compressors .............................................................................121

Operating sequence ............................................................................................183

P Part load and Full load .........................................................................................101Password

Applying the password .....................................................................................22Changing the password ...................................................................................22

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

-445

IX.fm

219/2220178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

description ........................................................................................................22Resetting the password ...................................................................................23

P-bandfactor ................................................................................................................71start delay ........................................................................................................71stop delay ......................................................................................................... 71

PBF ........................................................................................................................72PID

controller ..........................................................................................................81Port 1

menu description .............................................................................................. 40Port 2

menu description .............................................................................................. 41Position indications ..............................................................................................102Pref. master = START

Starting- and system numbers ....................................................................... 178Prelubrication

menu description .............................................................................................. 34Press

menu description .............................................................................................. 42Pressure

measured/calculated pressure levelsrecip.compressors ......................................................................................50screw compr. .............................................................................................. 48

measured/calculated pressures/temperaturesHPO-HPC ...................................................................................................51

Pressure transducersCalibration ......................................................................................................125

Printed circuit board, light diodes ........................................................................146

R Regulators .............................................................................................................79Replacing

CPU print and EEPROM ................................................................................160the battery ......................................................................................................163the CPU print .................................................................................................159the door ..........................................................................................................159the EPROM (program) UNISAB II ..................................................................161the relay print .................................................................................................160the serial EEPROM (diagnosis) .....................................................................162

Rotatunemenu description ........................................................................................42, 43

S SequenceThe plant does not run in sequence ...............................................................194

Serial numberDiagnosis ....................................................................................................... 141

Service ................................................................................................................. 159

UNISAB II 2.03

220/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

Set pointscontrol with current input ..................................................................................91on regulators ....................................................................................................90

Settingsregulating parameters

reciprocating compressors .........................................................................86SAB 330 .....................................................................................................90screw compressors .....................................................................................88

Short-Stroke Capacity-RodAdjusting ........................................................................................................132

Slide brake control ...............................................................................................102Spacer block

built-in space block ........................................................................................100Spare parts for UNISAB II ...................................................................................209Special Limiters ...................................................................................................107State of take-over ................................................................................................189State of transfer ...................................................................................................188Suction Pressure

menu description ..............................................................................................33Superuser keyword

Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141Swept volumen

menu description ..............................................................................................39System numbers ..................................................................................................177

T TemperatureMeasured and calculated temperatures

screw compressors .....................................................................................50measured and calculated temperatures

screw compressors .....................................................................................49measured/calculated pressures/temperatures

HPO-HPC ...................................................................................................51Timer description

reciprocating compressors ...............................................................................69screw compressors ..........................................................................................66

Timersmenu ................................................................................................................61reciprocating compressor values .....................................................................65screw compressor values ................................................................................63

Trouble shooting ..................................................................................................137Trouble-shooting

The plant cannot start ....................................................................................194Trouble-shooting diagrams

General trouble-shooting, UNISAB II .............................................................156Start compressor

in AUTO, continued ..........................................................................153, 154in MANUAL, continued .............................................................................150

Start of compressor

UNISAB II 2.03

0178

-445

IX.fm

221/2220178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

in AUTO mode ..........................................................................................152in MANUAL mode .....................................................................................149

Start Screw comp,Prelub. in MANUAL, continued .................................................................151

Start Screw comp.Prelub. in AUTO mode, continued ............................................................155

U Universal regulatorext.input ...........................................................................................................91

Unloading sequence ....................................................................................182, 185

V Valuechanging a value .............................................................................................. 23

Variable Zero position ............................................................................................98Vi

mode ................................................................................................................41Volume ratio

auto ..................................................................................................................34Volume ratio slide ..................................................................................................97

W WarningEvolution

warning from PLC .......................................................................................58identification numbers alarms / warnings .........................................................59watch the oil pressure ......................................................................................57

Watercooling

recip. compr. ...............................................................................................36menu description .............................................................................................. 33

Y Yellow ....................................................................................................................14

Z Zero capacity pos.Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 142

Zero pointautomatic setting .............................................................................................. 99configuration ..................................................................................................100manual setting of a new zero point ..................................................................99

Zero pos.menu ..............................................................................................................101

UNISAB II 2.03

222/222 0178-445 - ENGRev. 03.09

2.02-020911 IVH

0179-005-EN 1

Date: ____________ Init: ______

Settings for UNISAB II 2.03

Customer: ROC No.:

Enduser: Order No.:

Plant Type:

Compressor Shop No.: Compressor Type:

Local Compr. No. : Software version/date

2.02-020911 IVH

0179-005-EN 2


Setup>Configuration

>Control >Economizer >COP >Measuring unit

No Function Setting No Function Setting No Function Setting No Function Setting

01 Control On 01 Eco Low Cap. 01 COP Active 01 Press./Temp.

02 Auto Start 02 Eco High Suction 02 Flow Factor 02 Press

03 Auto Stop 03 Liq. Sub-cooling 03 Motor Signal

04 Cold Store >Motor 04 Motor Input

05 Climate Control No Function Setting >Communication 05 Cap/Freq

01 Range Motor Current No Function Setting >Unit Plant

>Compressor 02 Range Motor Power 01 Danbuss No Function Setting

No Function Setting 03 Motor size kW 02 Compressor No. 01 Refrigerant

01 Compressor Type 04 Rotatune 03 Baud Rate 02 Chiller

02 Swept Volume 05 min freq 04 Port 1 >Factory reset

03 Booster 06 max freq 05 Node No 01 Factory Reset

04 Volume Ratio >Multisab 06 Baud Rate

05 Economizer No Function Setting 07 Port 2

06 Mech. Zero 01 Pref. Master 08 Node No

07 Manual Zero 02 Common Evap/Cond 09 Baud Rate

08 Vi Mode % 03 HP on Two Stage 10 Profibus

09 Add. Unload 04 Take Over 11 Node No

>Oil system 12 Baud Rate

No Function Setting

01 Pre-lubrication

02 Full Flow Pump

03 Oil Cooling

04 Water Cooled

05 Oil Rectifier

2.02-020911 IVH

0179-005-EN 3


Alarm-/Warning Limits & RegulatorSettings (1)

HighAlarm

HighWarning

LowWarning

LowAlarm

Set pt.No. 1

Set pt.No. 2

NZ PB T.INTE

T.DIFF

MINPULS

RUNTIME

Suction>Suction pressure [ºC/R]

Suction>Suction superheat

Discharge>Disch. superheat

Oil>Oil pressure

Oil>Diff. pressure (*S)

Oil>Oil temperature

Motor>Motor current

Motor>Motor Power

Setup>Capacity>Capacity (*S)

Setup>Capacity>Vi Position (*S)

Intermediate>Interm. temperature (*R)

All the empty/not used squares must always be filled out. ///////////

The availability of the areas framed is dependent upon the configuration of the UNISAB II.

Setup>Control (1+2) Setup>Multisab>Multisab state (2) Setup>Diagnose> Setup>Language (2) >Setup>Diagnose

Compressor Control Start No. System No. Sys. Controller Software version / date Contrast Language >Misc. functions

Brake Delay

2.02-020911 IVH

0179-005-EN 4


Setup>Calibrate>Press Transducer

Setup>Calibrate>Brine Temp. (2)

Setup>Calibrate>Cap. Pos

Setup>Calibrate>Motor Freq

Suction Adjust Brine Adjust Cap. Pos Motor Freq

Discharge Adjust Cap. Zero Ad Frq. Zero Adj

Oil Adjust Cap. 100 Adj Freq. 100 Adj

Diff. Adjust

Imed. Adjust

Setup>Calibrate>Vi position

Setup>Calibrate>4-20mA Input

Setup>Calibrate>Aux. Output

Setup>Calibrate>Cap. Limits (1)

Vi Position 4mA Activate When Signal Low

Vi. Zero Adj 20mA Signal High

Vi. 100 Adj Used at Limit High

Setup>Timers>Timers Setup (1)

No Function Setting No Function Setting No Function Setting

Prelubrication (*S)01 Start-Start Delay 07

Delay Down (*R)25 Oil Rect. Start

02 Stop-Start Delay 08 Transfer max 26 Oil Rect. Delay

03 Start Delay 09-20 NOT ADJUSTABLE 27 Oil Rect. Disable

04 Stop Delay 21 Motor Start 28 Start HP

05 Suction Ramp 22 PMS Feedback 29 NOT ADJUSTABLE

Slide Max (*S) F.F. Pump Start (*S) 30 Cap. Negative (*S)06

Delay Up (*R)23

Oil Cool On (*R) 31 Start Unload (*S)

Oil Pump Start (*S) 32 Low suct. press24

Oil Return (*R) 33 NOT ADJUSTABLE

2.02-020911 IVH

0179-005-EN 5


Setup>Timers>Service (2)

Setup>Timers>P Band Factor (1)

Setup>Timers>Transfer (1)

Setup>Timers>Take Over (1)

On Time Delay Up (*R) Factor Down (*R) Factor Up (*R)

(Service Hours) Delay Down (*R) Zone (*R) Factor Start (*R)

Start Delay Zone (*R)

Stop Delay

Notes:

*(S) = Screw, *(R) = Reciprocating

(1) The value(s) will be changed to factory settings by a “Factor Reset”.(2) The value(s) are not stored in the EEPROM and will therefore be changed to ‘initial settings’ after a “Copy EEPROM” messages on the display.

The hour counter “Setup>Timers>Service>On Time” will be reset to zero.

Date: Init.:

96.09

1661-215-EN 1Rev. 0

Customer: Ordre no.:

Compressor shop no.: Compr. type:

Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms

Alarm text (type of alarm)

Date and time of alarm

Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms > Ctrl state Current operating conditions Unit

Compressor Control Text

Compressor State Text

Start no 0-14

System no 1-14

Multisab state Text

On time Hour

Since start Sec/Hour

Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms >Measure values

Current operating

Unit Diagnosis > Inspect oldalarms >

Diagnosis>

conditionsNo Input Output Digital

InputDigitalOutput

Suction temp. °C 1

Suction press. °C/R 2

Suction superheat °C 3

Disch. temp °C 4

Disch. press. °C/R 5

Disch. superheat °C 6

Brine temp. °C 7

Oil temp. °C 8

Oil press. BAR 9

Diff. press. (S) BAR 10

Intermediate press. (R) °C/R 11

Intermediate temp. (R) °C 12 ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉVi position (S) % 13 ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉCapacity position % 14 ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉExt. input 15 ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉMotor current Amp 16 ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ17 ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ18 ÉÉÉÉ

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ

Notes: * (S) = Screw, (R) = Reciprocating

1661

-215

-EN

Rev

. 0

Documents

Unisab II(0178-445-ENG-logo)[1]